GE UR Series L90 Page 232 Instruction Manual Download | Manualshive

Page: 232 / 846

background image

5-94

L90 Line Current Differential System

GE Multilin

5.4 SYSTEM SETUP

5 SETTINGS

5

5.4.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PATH: SETTINGS



SYSTEM SETUP



SWITCHES



SWITCH 1(16)

The disconnect switch element contains the auxiliary logic for status and serves as the interface for opening and closing of
disconnect switches from SCADA or through the front panel interface. The disconnect switch element can be used to cre-
ate an interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the switch pole position, both the 89/a and 89/b
auxiliary contacts are used with reporting of the discrepancy between them. The number of available disconnect switches
depends on the number of the CT/VT modules ordered with the L90.

•

SWITCH 1 FUNCTION:

This setting enables and disables the operation of the disconnect switch element.

•

SWITCH 1 NAME:

Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the disconnect switch. This name will be used

in flash messages related to disconnect switch 1.

•

SWITCH 1 MODE:

This setting selects “3-Pole” mode, where disconnect switch poles have a single common auxiliary

switch, or “1-Pole” mode where each disconnect switch pole has its own auxiliary switch.



SWITCH 1



SWITCH 1
FUNCTION: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1 NAME:
SW 1

Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1 MODE:
3-Pole

Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1 OPEN:
Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN:
Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1 CLOSE:
Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE:
Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

SWTCH 1



A/3P CLSD:

Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

SWTCH 1



A/3P OPND:

Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1



B CLOSED:

Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1



B OPENED:

Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1



C CLOSED:

Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1



C OPENED:

Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1 Toperate:
0.070 s

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1 ALARM
DELAY: 0.000

s

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

SWITCH 1 EVENTS:
Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

«
...
230
231
232
233
234
...
»

Summary of Contents for UR Series L90

Page 1: ...081 Z1 GEK 119522 GE Digital Energy 650 Markland Street Markham Ontario Canada L6C 0M1 Tel 1 905 927 7070 Fax 1 905 927 5098 Internet http www GEDigitalEnergy com GE Multilin s Quality Management System is registered to ISO 9001 2008 QMI 005094 UL A3775 1601 0081 Z1 LISTED 52TL IND CONT EQ E83849 GE Digital Energy ...

Page 2: ...ber Digital Energy Multilin and GE Multilin are trademarks or registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc This documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of GE Multilin The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to change without notice Part numb...

Page 3: ...ENU HIERARCHY 1 18 1 5 4 RELAY ACTIVATION 1 18 1 5 5 RELAY PASSWORDS 1 19 1 5 6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION 1 19 1 5 7 COMMISSIONING 1 20 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 1 INTRODUCTION 2 1 1 OVERVIEW 2 1 2 1 2 FEATURES 2 3 2 1 3 ORDERING 2 4 2 1 4 REPLACEMENT MODULES 2 12 2 2 PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING 2 2 1 INTER RELAY COMMUNICATIONS 2 15 2 2 2 CHANNEL MONITOR 2 16 2 2 3 LOOPBACK TEST 2 17 2 2 4 DIRECT TRANSFER ...

Page 4: ... AND FIBER INTERFACE 3 34 3 3 9 IEEE C37 94 INTERFACE 3 34 3 3 10 C37 94SM INTERFACE 3 38 4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4 1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 1 1 INTRODUCTION 4 1 4 1 2 CREATING A SITE LIST 4 1 4 1 3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW 4 1 4 1 4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW 4 3 4 2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4 2 1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES 4 4 4 2 2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS...

Page 5: ... 141 5 5 5 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR 5 145 5 5 6 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS 5 145 5 5 7 FLEXELEMENTS 5 146 5 5 8 NON VOLATILE LATCHES 5 150 5 6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 6 1 OVERVIEW 5 151 5 6 2 SETTING GROUP 5 151 5 6 3 LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT 5 152 5 6 4 LINE PICKUP 5 158 5 6 5 DISTANCE 5 160 5 6 6 POWER SWING DETECT 5 178 5 6 7 LOAD ENCROACHMENT 5 187 5 6 8 PHASE CURRENT 5 189 5 6 9 NEUTRAL CURRENT 5 199 5 6 ...

Page 6: ... CONTACT INPUTS 6 4 6 2 2 VIRTUAL INPUTS 6 4 6 2 3 REMOTE INPUTS 6 4 6 2 4 REMOTE DOUBLE POINT STATUS INPUTS 6 5 6 2 5 DIRECT INPUTS 6 5 6 2 6 CONTACT OUTPUTS 6 5 6 2 7 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS 6 6 6 2 8 AUTORECLOSE 6 6 6 2 9 REMOTE DEVICES 6 6 6 2 10 CHANNEL TESTS 6 7 6 2 11 DIGITAL COUNTERS 6 8 6 2 12 SELECTOR SWITCHES 6 8 6 2 13 FLEX STATES 6 9 6 2 14 ETHERNET 6 9 6 2 15 REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING 6 ...

Page 7: ... 2 8 1 5 PASSWORD REQUIREMENTS 8 3 8 2 CYBERSENTRY 8 2 1 OVERVIEW 8 4 8 2 2 SECURITY MENU 8 5 9 THEORY OF OPERATION 9 1 OVERVIEW 9 1 1 L90 DESIGN 9 1 9 1 2 L90 ARCHITECTURE 9 1 9 1 3 REMOVAL OF DECAYING OFFSET 9 2 9 1 4 PHASELET COMPUTATION 9 2 9 1 5 DISTURBANCE DETECTION 9 3 9 1 6 FAULT DETECTION 9 3 9 1 7 GROUND DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT 9 4 9 1 8 CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION 9 5 9 1 9 FREQUENCY TRACKING AN...

Page 8: ...UP 10 3 10 2 3 CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1 10 3 10 2 4 CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 2 10 3 10 2 5 CURRENT DIFF BREAK POINT 10 3 10 2 6 CT TAP 10 4 10 2 7 BREAKER AND A HALF 10 6 10 2 8 DISTRIBUTED BUS PROTECTION 10 9 10 3 CHANNEL ASYMMETRY COMPENSATION USING GPS 10 3 1 DESCRIPTION 10 10 10 3 2 COMPENSATION METHOD 1 10 10 10 3 3 COMPENSATION METHOD 2 10 11 10 3 4 COMPENSATION METHOD 3 10 11 10 4 DISTANCE BA...

Page 9: ...B 2 2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS FUNCTION CODE 03 04H B 3 B 2 3 EXECUTE OPERATION FUNCTION CODE 05H B 4 B 2 4 STORE SINGLE SETTING FUNCTION CODE 06H B 4 B 2 5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS FUNCTION CODE 10H B 5 B 2 6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES B 5 B 3 FILE TRANSFERS B 3 1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS B 6 B 3 2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION B 7 B 4 MEMORY MAPPING B 4 1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP B 9 B 4 2 DATA FORMA...

Page 10: ...H ENERVISTA UR SETUP C 17 C 5 5 ABOUT SCD FILES C 17 C 5 6 IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP C 20 C 6 ACSI CONFORMANCE C 6 1 ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT C 22 C 6 2 ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT C 22 C 6 3 ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT C 23 C 7 LOGICAL NODES C 7 1 LOGICAL NODES TABLE C 26 D IEC 60870 5 104 COMMUNICATIONS D 1 IEC 60870 5 104 D 1 1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT...

Page 11: ...ι σήμανση με αυτό το σύμβολο το οποίο μπορεί να περιλαμβάνει γράμματα για να δηλώσουν το κάδμιο Cd τον μόλυβδο Pb ή τον υδράργυρο Hg Για την κατάλληλη ανακύκλωση επιστρέψτε την μπαταρία στον προμηθευτή σας ή σε καθορισμένο σημείο συλλογής Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες δείτε www recyclethis info ES Eliminacion de baterias Este producto contiene una batería que no se pueda eliminar como basura normal...

Page 12: ...s info PL Pozbywanie się zużytych baterii Ten produkt zawiera baterie które w Unii Europejskiej mogą być usuwane tylko jako posegregowane odpady komunalne Dokładne informacje dotyczące użytych baterii znajdują się w dokumentacji produktu Baterie oznaczone tym symbolem mogą zawierać dodatkowe oznaczenia literowe wskazujące na zawartość kadmu Cd ołowiu Pb lub rtęci Hg Dla zapewnienia właściwej utyli...

Page 13: ...z Bu sembolle işaretlenmiş piller Kadmiyum Cd Kurşun Pb ya da Civa Hg içerebilir Doğru geri dönüşüm için ürünü yerel tedarikçinize geri veriniz ya da özel işaretlenmiş toplama noktlarına atınız Daha fazla bilgi için www recyclethis info Global Contacts From GE Part Number 1604 0021 A1 GE Publication Number GEK 113574 North America 905 294 6222 Latin America 55 11 3614 1700 Europe Middle East Afric...

Page 14: ...xiv L90 Line Current Differential System GE Multilin 0 1 BATTERY DISPOSAL 0 BATTERY DISPOSAL 0 ...

Page 15: ...ge in excess of the specified limits Only qualified personnel are to operate the device Such personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all safety cau tions and warnings in this manual and with applicable country regional utility and plant safety regulations Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to current transformers voltage transformers control and test c...

Page 16: ...ounting screws For product information instruction manual updates and the latest software updates visit the GE Digital Energy website at http www gedigitalenergy com If there is any noticeable physical damage or any of the contents listed are missing please contact GE Digital Energy immediately GE DIGITAL ENERGY CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT GE Digital Energy 650 Markland...

Page 17: ...educing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity and in increasing system reliability and efficiency These objectives are realized through software that is used to perform func tions at both the station and supervisory levels The use of these systems is growing rapidly High speed communication is required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and mo...

Page 18: ...e CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines The UR series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR series devices The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR series devices Remote outputs are FlexLogic oper ands...

Page 19: ... the system Employing OOD OOP in the software architecture of the L90 achieves the same features as the hardware architecture modularity scalability and flexibility The application software for any UR series device for example feeder protection transformer protection distance protection is constructed by combining objects from the various functional classes This results in a common interface acros...

Page 20: ...ualified modems have been tested to be compliant with the L90 and the EnerVista UR Setup software US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686 US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2 PCTEL 2304WT V 92 MDC internal modem 1 3 2 INSTALLATION After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup are met previous section install the EnerVista UR Setup from the GE EnerVista CD Or download the UR ...

Page 21: ...llation program automatically creates icons and adds EnerVista UR Setup to the Windows start menu 8 Click Finish to complete the installation The UR series device is added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad window as shown 1 3 3 CONFIGURING THE L90 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS a OVERVIEW The user can connect remotely to the L90 through the rear RS485 port or the rear Ethernet port wit...

Page 22: ...om http www gedigitalenergy com multilin See the Software Installation section if not already installed 2 Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup 3 Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site 4 Enter a site name in the Site Name field Optionally add a short description of the site along with ...

Page 23: ...tup software is installed available from the GE EnerVista CD or online from http www gedigitalenergy com multilin See the Software Installation section for installation details 2 Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup 3 Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window then click the Add Site button to define a new site 4 Enter the desired site na...

Page 24: ...erVista CD or online from http www gedigitalenergy com multilin See the Software Installation section if not already installed 2 Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup 3 Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box 4 Select the Serial interface and the correct COM Port then click Connect 5 The EnerVista UR Setup software creates a site ...

Page 25: ...ssign the computer an IP address compatible with the relay s IP address 1 From the Windows desktop right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network con nections window 2 Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties 842799A1 CDR END 1 END 2 Pin Wire color Diagram Pin Wire color Diagram 1 White orange 1 White green 2 Orange 2 Green 3 White green 3 ...

Page 26: ...ting Start Run from the Windows Start menu and typing cmd 2 Type the following command substituting the IP address of 1 1 1 1 with yours C WINNT ping 1 1 1 1 3 If the connection is successful the system returns four replies similar to the following Pinging 1 1 1 1 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 1 1 1 1 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 255 Reply from 1 1 1 1 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 255 Reply from 1 1 1 1 by...

Page 27: ... data verify the physical connection between the L90 and the laptop computer and double check the programmed IP address in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS setting then repeat step 2 7 If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C WINNT ping 1 1 1 1 command Pinging 1 1 1 1 with 32 bytes of data Destination host unreachable Destination host unreachable Destina...

Page 28: ...uick Connect dialog box 4 Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the L90 then click the Connect button The EnerV ista UR Setup software creates a site named Quick Connect with a corresponding device also named Quick Con nect and displays them at the upper left of the screen 5 Expand the sections to view data directly from the L90 device Each time the EnerVista UR Setup ...

Page 29: ...MATIC DISCOVERY OF ETHERNET DEVICES The EnerVista UR Setup software can automatically discover and communicate to all UR series IEDs located on an Ether net network Using the Quick Connect feature a single click of the mouse triggers the software to automatically detect any UR series relays located on the network The EnerVista UR Setup software then proceeds to configure all settings and order cod...

Page 30: ...ngs can now be edited printed or changed See chapter 4 in this manual or the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for information about the using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface QUICK ACTION HOT LINKS The EnerVista UR Setup software has several quick action buttons to provide instant access to several functions that are often performed when using L90 relays From the online window users can selec...

Page 31: ...RS485 port from a computer RS232 port the GE Multilin RS232 RS485 converter box is required This device catalog number F485 connects to the computer using a straight through serial cable A shielded twisted pair 20 22 or 24 AWG connects the F485 converter to the L90 rear communications port The converter terminals GND are connected to the L90 communication module COM terminals See the CPU communica...

Page 32: ...ctual value messages are arranged hierarchically The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters while sub header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub header display pages fall below this level The MESSAGE UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers sub headers setting values...

Page 33: ...MMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes but allows the user to perform the fol lowing operations Operate breakers via faceplate keypad Change state of virtual inputs Clear event records Clear oscillography records Operate user programmable pushbuttons 2 SETTING The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values See the Changing ...

Page 34: ...lay display messages and LED indications 3 LED test 4 Visual inspection for any damage corrosion dust or loose wires 5 Event recorder file download with further events analysis Out of service maintenance 1 Check wiring connections for firmness 2 Analog values currents voltages RTDs analog inputs injection test and metering accuracy verification Calibrated test equipment is required 3 Protection el...

Page 35: ... the relay is completely dependent on data received from the remote end special attention must be paid to information validation The L90 incorporates a high degree of secu rity by using a 32 bit CRC cyclic redundancy code inter relay communications packet In addition to current differential protection the relay provides multiple backup protection for phase and ground faults For overcurrent protect...

Page 36: ...s Transducer Inputs Outputs Control Pushbuttons Line Pickup User Definable Displays CT Failure Detector Load Encroachment User Programmable LEDs CyberSentry security Metering Current Voltage Power Energy Frequency Demand Power Factor 87L current local and remote phasors User Programmable Pushbuttons Data Logger Modbus Communications User Programmable Self Tests Digital Counters 8 Modbus User Map V...

Page 37: ... direct fiber multiplexed RS422 IEEE C37 94 and G 703 connections with relay ID check Per phase line differential protection direct transfer trip plus eight user assigned pilot signals via the communications channel Secure 32 bit CRC protection against communications errors Channel asymmetry up to 10 ms compensation using GPS satellite controlled clock BACKUP PROTECTION DTT provision for pilot sch...

Page 38: ... X Full Size Horizontal Mount BASE UNIT L90 Base Unit CPU T RS485 and Three Multi mode fiber 100Base FX SFP with LC U RS485 and Two Multi mode fiber 100Base FX SFP with LC One 10 100Base T SFP with RJ45 V RS485 and Three 10 100Base T SFP with RJ45 SOFTWARE 00 No software options 02 Breaker and a half 03 IEC 61850 05 Breaker and a half and IEC 61850 06 Phasor measurement unit PMU 07 IEC 61850 and P...

Page 39: ...Lvl 1 IEC 61850 and PMU G8 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 Breaker and a half and PMU G9 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 IEC 16850 Breaker and a half and PMU GO IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection GP IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection and IEC 61850 GQ IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection and PMU GR IEEE 1588 PRP Cyber...

Page 40: ...itoring and 4 Form C outputs 4 digital inputs 6T 6T 6T 6T 6T 4 Form A no monitoring outputs 8 digital inputs 6U 6U 6U 6U 6U 6 Form A no monitoring outputs 4 digital inputs 6V 6V 6V 6V 6V 2 Form A outputs 1 Form C output 2 Form A no monitoring latching outputs 8 digital inputs TRANSDUCER INPUTS OUTPUTS select a maximum of 3 per unit 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 4 dcmA inputs 4 dcmA outputs only one 5A module is ...

Page 41: ...EE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 IEC 61850 and PMU G8 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 Breaker and a half and PMU G9 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 IEC 16850 Breaker and a half and PMU GO IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection GP IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection and IEC 61850 GQ IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection and PM...

Page 42: ...i mode LED 1 Channel 7C 1300 nm single mode ELED 1 Channel 7D 1300 nm single mode LASER 1 Channel 7E Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 820 nm multi mode 7F Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1300 nm multi mode 7G Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1300 nm single mode ELED 7H 820 nm multi mode LED 2 Channels 7I 1300 nm multi mode LED 2 Channels 7J 1300 nm single mode ELED 2 Channels 7K 1300 nm single mode LASER 2 Channels 7...

Page 43: ...Lvl 1 Breaker and a half and PMU G9 IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 IEC 16850 Breaker and a half and PMU GO IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection GP IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection and IEC 61850 GQ IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection and PMU GR IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection IEC 61850...

Page 44: ... 1300nm single mode ELED 1 channel single mode 2B C37 94SM 1300nm single mode ELED 2 channel single mode 2E Bi phase single channel 2F Bi phase dual channel 72 1550 nm single mode LASER 1 Channel 73 1550 nm single mode LASER 2 Channel 74 Channel 1 RS422 Channel 2 1550 nm single mode LASER 75 Channel 1 G 703 Channel 2 1550 nm Single mode LASER 76 IEEE C37 94 820 nm 64 kbps multimode LED 1 Channel 7...

Page 45: ...MU GO IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection GP IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection and IEC 61850 GQ IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection and PMU GR IEEE 1588 PRP CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection IEC 61850 and PMU H0 CyberSentry Lvl 1 In zone transformer protection and Breaker and a half H1 CyberSentry Lvl...

Page 46: ...current with optional voltage outputs 8 digital inputs 6P 6 Form A current with optional voltage outputs 4 digital inputs 6R 2 Form A no monitoring and 2 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6S 2 Form A no monitoring and 4 Form C outputs 4 digital inputs 6T 4 Form A no monitoring outputs 8 digital inputs 6U 6 Form A no monitoring outputs 4 digital inputs 6V 2 Form A outputs 1 Form C output 2 Form A no ...

Page 47: ... 4 Form C and 4 Fast Form C outputs 6L 2 Form A current with optional voltage and 2 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6M 2 Form A current with optional voltage and 4 Form C outputs 4 digital inputs 6N 4 Form A current with optional voltage outputs 8 digital inputs 6P 6 Form A current with optional voltage outputs 4 digital inputs 6R 2 Form A no monitoring and 2 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6S 2 F...

Page 48: ... outputs 4 digital inputs 6N 4 Form A current with optional voltage outputs 8 digital inputs 6P 6 Form A current with optional voltage outputs 4 digital inputs 6R 2 Form A no monitoring and 2 Form C outputs 8 digital inputs 6S 2 Form A no monitoring and 4 Form C outputs 4 digital inputs 6T 4 Form A no monitoring outputs 8 digital inputs 6U 6 Form A no monitoring outputs 4 digital inputs 6V 2 Form ...

Page 49: ...ity of the current differential scheme on a three terminal system by reducing reliance on communications The main difference between a master and a slave L90 is that only a master relay performs the actual current differential calculation and only a master relay communicates with the relays at all other terminals of the protected line At least one master L90 relay must have live communications to ...

Page 50: ...rent differential protection Note that a failure of the communications from the master to a slave does not prevent the master from performing the current differential algorithm failure of the communications from a slave to the master will prevent the master from performing the correct current differential logic Channel propagation delay is being continuously measured and adjusted according to chan...

Page 51: ...n the relay to simplify single ended testing 2 2 4 DIRECT TRANSFER TRIPPING The L90 includes provision for sending and receiving a single pole direct transfer trip DTT signal from current differential protection between the L90 relays at the line terminals using the pilot communications channel The user may also initiate an additional eight pilot signals with an L90 communications channel to creat...

Page 52: ... and dif ferential currents are also displayed at all relays allowing the user opportunity to analyze correct polarization of currents at all terminals Event records The relay has a sequence of events recorder which combines the recording of snapshot data and oscillography data Events consist of a broad range of change of state occurrences including input contact changes measuring element pickup a...

Page 53: ...ailure alarm will become de energized if the relay self test algorithms detect a failure that would prevent the relay from properly protecting the transmission line b LOCAL USER INTERFACE The local user interface on the faceplate consists of a 2 20 liquid crystal display LCD and keypad The keypad and dis play may be used to view data from the relay to change settings in the relay or to perform con...

Page 54: ...of 1 VT location all delta wye and wye delta transformers CT location all delta wye and wye delta transformers Voltage supervision pickup series compensation applications 0 to 5 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Operation time 1 to 1 5 cycles typical Reset time 1 power cycle typical GROUND DISTANCE Characteristic Mho memory polarized or offset or Quad memory polarized or non direc tional Reactance polariza...

Page 55: ...r Security for sequential and evolving faults RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT Pickup 0 005 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Dropout 97 to 98 of pickup Slope 0 to 100 in steps of 1 Pickup delay 0 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 Dropout delay 0 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 Operate time 1 power system cycle PHASE NEUTRAL GROUND TOC Current Phasor or RMS Pickup level 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Dropout le...

Page 56: ...FlexLogic operands Tripping reverse load forward fault 12 ms typically Blocking forward load reverse fault 8 ms typically NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT Directionality Co existing forward and reverse Polarizing Voltage Current Dual Polarizing voltage V_0 or VX Polarizing current IG Operating current I_0 Level sensing 3 I_0 K I_1 IG Restraint K 0 000 to 0 500 in steps of 0 001 Characteristic angle...

Page 57: ...chever is greater NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE Pickup level 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 Dropout level 97 to 98 of pickup Level accuracy 0 5 of reading from 10 to 208 V Pickup delay 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 definite time or user defined curve Reset delay 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 Curve timing accuracy at 1 1 x pickup 3 5 of operate time or 1 cycle whichever is greater from pickup to...

Page 58: ... ms which ever is greater Operate time 42 ms at 1 10 pickup at 60 Hz BREAKER RESTRIKE Principle detection of high frequency overcurrent condition cycle after breaker opens Availability one per CT VT module not including 8Z modules Pickup level 0 1 to 2 00 pu in steps of 0 01 Reset delay 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 SYNCHROCHECK Max voltage difference 0 to 400000 V in steps of 1 Max angle di...

Page 59: ... Reverse Polish Notation with graphical visualization keypad programmable Lines of code 512 Internal variables 64 Supported operations NOT XOR OR 2 to 16 inputs AND 2 to 16 inputs NOR 2 to 16 inputs NAND 2 to 16 inputs latch reset domi nant edge detectors timers Inputs any logical variable contact or virtual input Number of timers 32 Pickup delay 0 to 60000 ms sec min in steps of 1 Dropout delay 0...

Page 60: ...ver is greater 2 4 3 MONITORING OSCILLOGRAPHY Maximum records 64 Sampling rate 64 samples per power cycle Triggers any element pickup dropout or operate digital input change of state digital out put change of state FlexLogic equation Data AC input channels element state digital input state digital output state Data storage in non volatile memory EVENT RECORDER Capacity 1024 events Time tag to 1 mi...

Page 61: ...T PHASE NEUTRAL AND GROUND Accuracy at 0 1 to 2 0 CT rating 0 25 of reading or 0 1 of rated whichever is greater 2 0 CT rating 1 0 of reading RMS VOLTAGE Accuracy 0 5 of reading from 10 to 208 V REAL POWER WATTS Accuracy at 0 1 to 1 5 x CT rating and 0 8 to 1 2 x VT rating 1 0 of reading at 1 0 PF 0 8 and 0 8 PF 10 REACTIVE POWER VARS Accuracy at 0 1 to 1 5 x CT rating and 0 8 to 1 2 x VT rating 1...

Page 62: ...s 300 V DC maximum Selectable thresholds 17 V 33 V 84 V 166 V Tolerance 10 Contacts per common return 4 Recognition time 1 ms Debounce time 0 0 to 16 0 ms in steps of 0 5 Continuous current draw 3 mA when energized CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO BURNISHING Dry contacts 1000 maximum Wet contacts 300 V DC maximum Selectable thresholds 17 V 33 V 84 V 166 V Tolerance 10 Contacts per common return 2 Recognit...

Page 63: ... time 4 ms Contact material silver alloy LATCHING RELAY Make and carry for 0 2 s 30 A as per ANSI C37 90 Carry continuous 6 A as per IEEE C37 90 Break DC resistive as per IEC61810 1 Operate time 4 ms Contact material silver alloy Control separate operate and reset inputs Control mode operate dominant or reset dominant FORM A VOLTAGE MONITOR Applicable voltage approx 15 to 250 V DC Trickle current ...

Page 64: ...IONS RS232 Front port 19 2 kbps Modbus RTU RS485 1 rear port Up to 115 kbps Modbus RTU isolated together at 36 Vpk Typical distance 1200 m Isolation 2 kV ETHERNET FIBER ETHERNET 10 100 MB TWISTED PAIR Modes 10 MB 10 100 MB auto detect Connector RJ45 SIMPLE NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL SNTP clock synchronization error 10 ms typical PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL PTP PTP IEEE Std 1588 2008 version 2 Power Profile...

Page 65: ...degree II Overvoltage category II Ingress protection IP20 front IP10 back INTERFACE TYPE TYPICAL DISTANCE RS422 1200 m G 703 100 m EMITTER FIBER TYPE TRANSMIT POWER RECEIVED SENSITIVITY POWER BUDGET 820 nm LED Multimode 20 dBm 30 dBm 10 dB 1300 nm LED Multimode 21 dBm 30 dBm 9 dB 1300 nm ELED Singlemode 23 dBm 32 dBm 9 dB 1300 nm Laser Singlemode 1 dBm 30 dBm 29 dB 1550 nm Laser Singlemode 5 dBm 3...

Page 66: ...Class A and B Voltage interruption and ripple DC IEC60255 11 12 ripple 200 ms interrupts Radiated and conducted emissions CISPR11 CISPR22 IEC60255 25 Class A Sinusoidal vibration IEC60255 21 1 Class 1 Shock and bump IEC60255 21 2 Class 1 Seismic IEC60255 21 3 Class 1 Power magnetic immunity IEC61000 4 8 Level 5 Pulse magnetic immunity IEC61000 4 9 Level 4 Damped magnetic immunity IEC61000 4 10 Lev...

Page 67: ...ly cleaning is not required but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display a dry cloth can be used To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors power up units that are stored in a de energized state once per year for one hour continuously COMPLIANCE APPLICABLE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ACCORDING TO CE Low voltage directive EN 60255 5 EMC directive EN 60255 26 EN 50263 EN 61000...

Page 68: ...2 34 L90 Line Current Differential System GE Multilin 2 4 SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 ...

Page 69: ... to the removable modules and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth The case dimensions are shown below along with panel cutout details for panel mounting When planning the location of your panel cutout ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate s...

Page 70: ...ins additional user programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth The case dimensions are shown below along with panel cutout details for panel mounting When...

Page 71: ...te sits semi flush with the panel or switchgear door allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws supplied with the relay Figure 3 4 L90 VERTICAL DIMENSIONS ENHANCED PANEL 14 025 7 482 15 000 4 000 9 780 11 015 1 329 13 560 843809A1 CDR ...

Page 72: ...documents available online from the GE Multilin website GEK 113180 UR series UR V side mounting front panel assembly instructions GEK 113181 Connecting the side mounted UR V enhanced front panel to a vertical UR series device GEK 113182 Connecting the side mounted UR V enhanced front panel to a vertically mounted horizontal UR series device For details on side mounting L90 devices with the standar...

Page 73: ...GE Multilin L90 Line Current Differential System 3 5 3 HARDWARE 3 1 DESCRIPTION 3 Figure 3 6 L90 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION STANDARD PANEL ...

Page 74: ... avoid damage to the equipment use proper electrostatic discharge protection for example a static strap when coming in contact with modules while the relay is energized The relay being modular in design allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules Modules must only be replaced with like modules in their original factory configured slots The enhanced faceplate can be opened to the left once t...

Page 75: ...h current input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits To properly insert a module ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position The ejector inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis enga...

Page 76: ...idated transceivers in the wrong Ethernet slot else damage can occur The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in order by module slot position row number and column letter Two slot wide modules take their slot designation from the first slot position nearest to CPU module which is indicated by an arrow marker on the termina...

Page 77: ...GE Multilin L90 Line Current Differential System 3 9 3 HARDWARE 3 2 WIRING 3 3 2WIRING 3 2 1 TYPICAL WIRING Figure 3 12 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM ...

Page 78: ...C power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay see the Typical wiring diagram earlier The critical failure relay is a form C device that is energized once control power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self test failures If on going self test diagnostic checks detect a critical failure see the Self test errors section in chapter 7 or cont...

Page 79: ... nominal current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rat ing of the connected CTs Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protec tion CT VT modules can be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current input Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is withdrawn...

Page 80: ...ilde symbol with the slot position of the module in the following figure Figure 3 15 CT VT MODULE WIRING NOTE 1a 1b 1c 2a 2b 2c 3a 4a 5a 6a 7a 8a 3b 4b 5c 6c 7c 8c 3c 4c Current inputs 8F 8G 8L and 8M modules 4 CTs and 4 VTs Voltage inputs VA VB VC VX VA VB VC VX IA IC IB IG IA5 IC5 IB5 IG5 IA1 IC1 IB1 IG1 1a 5a 1b 5b 1c 5c 2a 6a 2b 6b 2c 6c 3a 7a 4a 8a 3b 7b 4b 8b 3c 7c 4c 8c Current inputs 84276...

Page 81: ... is different for the two applications The contact inputs are grouped with a common return The L90 has two versions of grouping four inputs per common return and two inputs per common return When a contact input output module is ordered four inputs per common is used The four inputs per common allows for high density inputs in combination with outputs with a compromise of four inputs sharing one c...

Page 82: ...fter it has closed and subsequently opened when measured as an impedance The solution is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set and connect the form A contact through a voltage dropping resistor to a DC voltage source If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a source a 500 10 W resistor is appropriate In this configuration the voltage across either the form A ...

Page 83: ... A 6a 6c 2 Inputs 6 Fast Form C 6a 6c 2 Inputs 6 Form A 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7 Fast Form C 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8 Fast Form C 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 6K MODULE 6L MODULE 6M MODULE 6N MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT OR INPUT 1 Form C 1 Form A 1 Form A 1 Form A 2 Form C 2 Form...

Page 84: ...A 6 Solid State 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7a 7c 2 Inputs 7 Form A 7 Not Used 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8a 8c 2 Inputs 8 Form A 8 Solid State 4B MODULE 4C MODULE 4D MODULE 4L MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OUTPUT 1 Not Used 1 Not Used 1a 1c 2 Inputs 1 2 Outputs 2 Solid State 2 Solid State 2a 2c 2 Inputs 2 2 Outputs 3 Not Used 3 Not Used 3a 3c 2...

Page 85: ...GE Multilin L90 Line Current Differential System 3 17 3 HARDWARE 3 2 WIRING 3 Figure 3 17 CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING 1 of 2 ...

Page 86: ... 2b 3b 4b 5b 6b 1a 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a 1c 2c 3c 4c 5c 6c 1 5 2 6 3 4 8a 7b 7a CONTACT IN 7a CONTACT IN 7c CONTACT IN 8a CONTACT IN 8c COMMON 7b SURGE 8c 7c 8b I V I V I V I V DIGITAL I O 6N 1b 2b 3b 4b 6c 1a 2a 3a 4a 5a 6a 1c 2c 3c 4c 5c 5b 1 2 3 4 8a 7b 7a CONTACT IN 7a CONTACT IN 5a CONTACT IN 7c CONTACT IN 5c CONTACT IN 8a CONTACT IN 6a CONTACT IN 8c CONTACT IN 6c COMMON 7b COMMON 5b SURGE 8c 7c 8b ...

Page 87: ...urce voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs detects a closed contact input is programmable as 17 V DC for 24 V sources 33 V DC for 48 V sources 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources and 166 V DC for 250 V sources Figure 3 19 DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS Wherever a tilde symbol appears substitute with the slot position of the mo...

Page 88: ... change of state was sensed Then within 25 to 50 ms this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the con tacts allowing for proper sensing of state changes If the external device contact is bouncing the auto burnishing starts when external device contact bouncing is over Another important difference between the auto burnishing input modul...

Page 89: ...connections These connections are arranged as three ter minals per row with a total of eight rows A given row can be used for either inputs or outputs with terminals in column a having positive polarity and terminals in column c having negative polarity Since an entire row is used for a single input output channel the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number Ea...

Page 90: ...r running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9 pin and 25 pin connectors The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps Figure 3 23 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION 3 2 9 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS a OPTIONS In addition to the faceplate RS232 port the L90 provides a rear RS485 communication port The CPU module...

Page 91: ...e a shared reference or common voltage This common voltage is implied to be a power supply common Some systems allow the shield drain wire to be used as common wire and to connect directly to the L90 COM terminal 3 others function cor rectly only if the common wire is connected to the L90 COM terminal but insulated from the shield To avoid loop currents ground the shield at only one point If other...

Page 92: ... RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION c 100BASE FX FIBER OPTIC PORTS Ensure that the dust covers are installed when the fiber is not in use Dirty or scratched connectors can lead to high losses on a fiber link Observing any fiber transmitter output can injure the eye The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 100 Mbps Optical fiber can be connected to the ...

Page 93: ...r DC level shifted or ampli tude modulated AM Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG B signal this equipment can use a GPS satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can be synchronized Figure 3 26 OPTIONS FOR THE IRIG B CONNECTION Using an amplitude modulated receiver causes errors up to 1 ms in event time stamping Using an ...

Page 94: ...ps multi mode LED 2 channels 2S Managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply 2T Managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply 72 1550 nm single mode laser 1 channel 73 1550 nm single mode laser 2 channels 74 Channel 1 RS422 channel 2 1550 nm single mode laser 75 Channel 1 G 703 channel 2 1550 nm single mode laser 76 IEEE C37 94 820 nm 64 kbps multi mode LED 1 channel 77 IEEE C37 ...

Page 95: ... higher order systems use the 72 to 77 modules or the 2A and 2B modules Observing any fiber transmitter output can injure the eye 3 3 2 FIBER LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A 7B 7C 7H 7I and 7J fiber only modules Figure 3 27 LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES 3 3 3 FIBER LASER TRANSMITTERS The following figure shows the configuration for the 72 73 7D and 7K...

Page 96: ... these pins see the Rear terminal assignments section earlier in this chapter All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer Figure 3 30 TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G 703 INTERFACES Pin nomenclature can differ from one manufacturer to another Therefore it is not uncommon to see pinouts num bered TxA TxB RxA and RxB In such cases it can be assumed that A...

Page 97: ...sabled OFF d G 703 TIMING MODES There are two timing modes for the G 703 module internal timing mode and loop timing mode default Internal Timing Mode The system clock is generated internally Therefore the G 703 timing selection should be in the internal timing mode for back to back UR to UR connections For back to back connections set for octet timing S1 OFF and timing mode to internal timing S5 ...

Page 98: ...NIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE In dual loopback mode the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals Differential Manchester data enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester transmitter module Likew...

Page 99: ...ETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES b TWO CHANNEL APPLICATION VIA MULTIPLEXERS The RS422 interface can be used for single channel or two channel applications over SONET SDH or multiplexed systems When used in single channel applications the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion observing transmit Tx receive Rx and send timing ST connections However when used in two channel app...

Page 100: ...rising edge of the 64 kHz transmit timing clock of the multiplexer interface is sampling the data in the center of the transmit data window Therefore it is impor tant to confirm clock and data transitions to ensure proper system operation For example the following figure shows the positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit Figure 3 37 CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS Data module 1 Da...

Page 101: ...OCK RS422 INTERFACE CONNECTIONS 3 3 7 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus fiberoptic interface configuration at 64K baud The 7L 7M 7N 7P and 74 modules are used in two terminal with a redundant channel or three terminal configurations where channel 1 is employed via the RS422 interface possibly with a multiplexer and channel 2 via direct fiber AWG 20 24 twi...

Page 102: ...n IEEE C37 94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input and output applications The IEEE C37 94 standard defines a point to point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device This data is typically 64 kbps but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps where n 1 2 12 The UR series C37 94 communication modules are either 64 kbps with n fixed...

Page 103: ...communications module cover removal procedure is as follows 1 With power to the relay off remove the IEEE C37 94 module type 76 or 77 module as follows Record the original location of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot 2 Simultaneously pull the ejector inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release...

Page 104: ...3 36 L90 Line Current Differential System GE Multilin 3 3 PILOT CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE 3 Figure 3 41 IEEE C37 94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING ...

Page 105: ...s is as follows Flashing green loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet Flashing yellow internal mode while receiving a valid data packet Solid red switch to internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet The link activity LED status is as follows Flashing green FPGA is receiving a valid data packet Solid yellow FPGA is receiving a yellow bit and remains yellow for each y...

Page 106: ...bit rate of 2048 kbps The specifications for the module are as follows Emulated IEEE standard emulates C37 94 for 1 64 kbps optical fiber interface modules set to n 1 or 64 kbps Fiber optic cable type 9 125 m core diameter optical fiber Fiber optic mode single mode ELED compatible with HP HFBR 1315T transmitter and HP HFBR 2316T receiver Fiber optic cable length up to 11 4 km Fiber optic connector...

Page 107: ...p and at the bottom of each module in order to release the module for removal 3 Remove the module cover screw 4 Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards 5 Set the timing selection switches channel 1 channel 2 to the desired timing modes see description above 6 Replace the top cover and the cover screw 7 Re insert the C37 94SM module Take care to ensure that the ...

Page 108: ...s is as follows Flashing green loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet Flashing yellow internal mode while receiving a valid data packet Solid red switch to internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet The link activity LED status is as follows Flashing green FPGA is receiving a valid data packet Solid yellow FPGA is receiving a yellow bit and remains yellow for each y...

Page 109: ...uired See the EnerVista UR Setup Help File or refer to the Connecting EnerVista UR Setup with the L90 section in Chapter 1 for details 4 1 3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW a ENGAGING A DEVICE The EnerVista UR Setup software can be used in online mode relay connected to directly communicate with the L90 relay Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites Sit...

Page 110: ...as a settings file has a URS extension that had been removed from the Settings List tree menu it is added back to the Settings List tree menu Drag and Drop The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target for device order code compatible files or individual menu items Also the Settings List control bar window and any Windows Explorer directory f...

Page 111: ...onents 1 Title bar that shows the pathname of the active data view 2 Main window menu bar 3 Main window tool bar 4 Site list control bar window 5 Settings list control bar window 6 Device data view windows with common tool bar 7 Settings file data view windows with common tool bar 8 Workspace area with data view tabs 9 Status bar 10 Quick action hot links Figure 4 1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAI...

Page 112: ...bled by default The following procedure describes how to enable the settings tem plate for UR series settings files 1 Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen 2 Right click the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode Create Template option The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue The settin...

Page 113: ...wable by clicking them The setting available to view is displayed against a yellow background as shown below Figure 4 3 SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE 6 Click on Save to save changes to the settings template 7 Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings c ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE It is highly recommended that templates be saved with...

Page 114: ...nly those settings available for editing Display all settings with settings not available for editing greyed out Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing 1 Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen 2 Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode View In Template Mode option 3 Enter the te...

Page 115: ...specified by the template but all settings are shown The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below Figure 4 6 APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND e REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE It can be necessary at some point to remove a settings template Once a template is removed it cannot be reapplied and it is necessary to define a new settings t...

Page 116: ...N ENTRIES The following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation 1 Right click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode Create Template item to enable the set tings template feature 2 Select the FlexLogic FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item By default all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow bac...

Page 117: ...below and on the front panel display Figure 4 9 SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW b LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number Once the desired FlexLogic entries in a settings file have been secured use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific serial number 1 Select the...

Page 118: ...been changed since the time of installation from a settings file When a settings file is transferred to a L90 device the date time and serial number of the L90 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC This infor mation can be compared with the L90 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised The traceability information is ...

Page 119: ...lay configuration since the settings file was saved a SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they are sent to an L90 device The L90 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup offline window as shown in the example below Figure 4 12 DEVICE DEFINIT...

Page 120: ...ODEL INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION LAST SETTING CHANGE c ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window then the traceability information is removed from the settings file If the user creates a new settings file then no traceabili...

Page 121: ...e EnerVista UR Setup software The front panel interface consists of LED panels an RS232 port keypad LCD display control pushbuttons and optional user programmable pushbuttons The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate that must be removed in order to access the keypad panel The following figure shows the h...

Page 122: ...t four columns contain the 48 user programmable LEDs The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message once the condition has been cleared these latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS INPUT OUTPUTS RESETTING menu The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature Figure 4 18 TYPICAL LED INDICATOR ...

Page 123: ...ection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A B or C LEDs VOLTAGE This LED indicates voltage was involved CURRENT This LED indicates current was involved FREQUENCY This LED indicates frequency was involved OTHER This LED indicates a composite function was involved PHASE A This LED indicates phase A was involved PHASE B This LED indicates phase B was involved PHASE C This LED indicates pha...

Page 124: ...element is asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A B or C LEDs This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent phase undervoltage etc This means that the phase A B and C operate oper ands for individual protection elements are ORed to t...

Page 125: ...Please note that the LEDs despite their default labels are fully user programmable The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2 The LEDs however are not pre programmed To match the pre printed label the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User programmable LEDs section of chapter 5 The LEDs are fully user programmable The default labels can be replaced by user printed l...

Page 126: ...nsert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures These tabs are used for removal of the default and custom LED labels It is important that the tool be used EXACTLY as shown below with the printed side containing the GE part number facing the user The label package shipped with every L90 contains the three default labels shown below the custom label template sh...

Page 127: ...ng procedure describes how to remove the LED labels from the L90 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels 1 Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath Make sure the bent tabs are pointing away from the relay 2 Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown below This attaches the label tool to the LED label ...

Page 128: ... the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs as shown below The following procedure describes how to remove the user programmable pushbutton labels from the L90 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels 1 Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath as shown below Make sure the bent tab is pointing away from the relay ...

Page 129: ...ACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 2 Slide the label tool under the user programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown below This attaches the label tool to the user programmable pushbutton label 3 Remove the tool and attached user programmable pushbutton label as shown below ...

Page 130: ...downloadable file The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text x edit boxes The following procedure demonstrates how to install uninstall the custom panel labeling 1 Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover GE Multilin part number 1501 0014 2 Pop out the LED module and or the blank module with a screwdriver as shown below Be careful not to damage the plastic covers 3 Place...

Page 131: ... The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups The VALUE keys increment or decrement numerical setting values when in programming mode These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode Alternatively val ues can be entered with the numeric keypad The decimal key initiates and advances to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point The HELP key can be pres...

Page 132: ... ENTER COMMAND PASSWORD This message appears when the USER 1 USER 2 or USER 3 key is pressed and a COMMAND PASSWORD is required i e if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and no com mands have been issued within the last 30 minutes Press USER 1 To Select Breaker This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required This mes sage displays for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is p...

Page 133: ...play the other actual value headers SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP Press the MENU key until the header for the first page of Settings appears This page contains settings to configure the relay SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP Press the MESSAGE DOWN key to move to the next Settings page This page con tains settings for System Setup Repeatedly press the MESSAGE UP and DOWN keys to display the other setting headers and...

Page 134: ...le the VALUE DOWN key displays the previous selection c ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT Text settings have data values which are fixed in length but user defined in character They can be upper case letters lower case letters numerals and a selection of special characters FLASH MESSAGE TIME 1 0 s For example select the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting MINIMUM 0 5 MAXI...

Page 135: ...ETUP message appears on the display 2 Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the PASSWORD SECURITY message appears on the display 3 Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display 4 Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed message is displayed 5 After the RELAY SETTINGS Not Programmed message appears on the display press the VALUE keys change ...

Page 136: ... 7 Type in a numerical password up to 10 characters and press the ENTER key 8 When the VERIFY NEW PASSWORD is displayed re type in the same password and press ENTER 9 When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears your new Setting or Command Password will be active f CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD To change an existing password follow the instructions in the previous section with the following ...

Page 137: ...via the any external communications interface for the next five minutes In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the any external communications inter face three times within a three minute time span the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to On and the L90 does not allow Settings or Command access via the any external communications interface for t...

Page 138: ...4 30 L90 Line Current Differential System GE Multilin 4 3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4 ...

Page 139: ...OCK See page 5 50 FAULT REPORTS See page 5 56 OSCILLOGRAPHY See page 5 58 DATA LOGGER See page 5 61 DEMAND See page 5 62 USER PROGRAMMABLE LEDS See page 5 63 USER PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS See page 5 67 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS See page 5 67 USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS See page 5 69 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS See page 5 74 USER DEFINABLE DISPLAYS See page 5 75 INSTALLATION See page 5 77 SETTINGS SYSTEM SETU...

Page 140: ...S See page 5 145 FLEXELEMENTS See page 5 146 NON VOLATILE LATCHES See page 5 150 SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 See page 5 151 SETTING GROUP 2 SETTING GROUP 6 SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS TRIP BUS See page 5 245 SETTING GROUPS See page 5 247 SELECTOR SWITCH See page 5 249 TRIP OUTPUT See page 5 255 UNDERFREQUENCY See page 5 261 OVERFREQUENCY See page 5 262 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE See page...

Page 141: ... 5 337 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS See page 5 339 REMOTE DEVICES See page 5 340 REMOTE INPUTS See page 5 341 REMOTE DPS INPUTS See page 5 342 REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS See page 5 343 REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS See page 5 343 DIRECT See page 5 343 RESETTING See page 5 346 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS See page 5 346 IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS See page 5 347 SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I O DCMA INPUTS See page 5 348 R...

Page 142: ...acteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram This includes the inputs settings fixed logic and the output operands generated abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per unit pu calculated quantities pu quantity actual quantity base quantity For current elements the base quantity is the...

Page 143: ...up dropout or operate are not recorded as events When set to Enabled events are created for Element PKP pickup Element DPO dropout Element OP operate The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state logic 1 to the dropout state logic 0 This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not 0 5 1 3 INTRODUCTION ...

Page 144: ...itional information to apply a restraint current properly or to allow the provision of additional features that operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure Given the flexibility of this approach it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device The int...

Page 145: ...e first character followed by numbers indicating the channel either 1 or 5 For three phase channel sets the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set For example F1 represents the three phase channel set of F1 F2 F3 where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels Upon startup the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and ...

Page 146: ...ing the date and time Clearing the breaker arcing current Clearing energy records Clearing the data logger Clearing the user programmable pushbutton states The following operations are under setting password supervision Changing any setting Test mode operation The command and setting passwords are defaulted to 0 when the relay is shipped from the factory When a password is set to 0 the password se...

Page 147: ...and access is enabled ACCESS REM SETG OFF Asserted when remote setting access is disabled ACCESS REM SETG ON Asserted when remote setting access is enabled ACCESS REM CMND OFF Asserted when remote command access is disabled ACCESS REM CMND ON Asserted when remote command access is enabled The appropriate events are also logged in the Event Recorder as well The FlexLogic operands and events are upd...

Page 148: ...he original password is not 0 then enter the original password in the Enter Password field and click the Send Password to Device button 5 The new password is accepted and a value is assigned to the ENCRYPTED PASSWORD item If you establish a local connection to the relay serial you cannot view remote passcodes d ACCESS SUPERVISION PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION The followin...

Page 149: ...ded upload of settings to a relay through the local or remote interfaces interface The following settings are available through the local front panel interface only LOCAL SETTING AUTH This setting is used for local front panel or RS232 interface setting access supervision Valid values for the FlexLogic operands are either On default or any physical Contact Input On value If this setting is On then...

Page 150: ... of the Flex Logic operand is continuously monitored for an off to on transition When this occurs remote setting access is permitted and the timer programmed with the Access Authorized Timeout setting value is started When this timer expires remote setting access is immediately denied If access is permitted and an off to on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected the timeout is restarted T...

Page 151: ...n port shared secret and vendor ID The following procedure is an example of how to set up a simple RADIUS server where the third party tool used is also an example a Download and install FreeRADIUS as the RADIUS server b In the RADIUSD CONF file locate the bind_address field and enter your RADIUS server IP address c In the USERS CONF file in the Path_to_Radius etc raddb folder add the following te...

Page 152: ... front panel can be pressed by an Administrator or Engineer role This also applies to the reset button which resets targets where targets are errors dis played on the front panel or the Targets panel of the EnerVista software The reset button has special behavior in that it allows these two roles to press it even when they are logged in through the RS232 port and not through the front panel To res...

Page 153: ...rrent access but it has no download access to any files on the device Observer is the default role if no authentication has been done to the device This role displays as None on the front panel The Factory service role is not available and is intended for factory use only c LOCAL PASSWORDS PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS The Change Local Passwords menu is shown on the f...

Page 154: ...main active even after device authentication is disabled and their only permission is to re enable device authentication To re enable device authentication the Supervisor unlocks the device for setting changes then the Administrator re enables device authentication Bypass Access Enabling this setting allows 502 Ethernet sessions to the relay The serial ports RS232 and RS485 allow settings write No...

Page 155: ...ry If disabled the Supervisor role is not allowed to log on In this case the Administrator can change the settings under the Supervisory menu If enabled Supervisor authentication is required to change the settings in the Supervisory menu If the Supervisor disables his role after authentication the Supervisor session remains valid until he switches to another role using MMI or until he ends the cur...

Page 156: ...y as zero while others prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal The L90 applies a cut off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents If the magnitude is below the cut off level it is substi tuted with zero This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical compo nents The cut off opera...

Page 157: ...100 A 13811 2 V 66 4 V 720 5 watts Any calculated power value below this cut off will not be displayed As well the three phase energy data will not accumu late if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut off Lower the VOLTAGE CUT OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower sig nals as valid measurements Unless dictated otherwise by a specific...

Page 158: ...lear records the user programma ble pushbuttons can provide extra security if required For example to assign user programmable pushbutton 1 to clear demand records the following settings should be applied 1 Assign the clear demand function to pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu CLEAR DEMAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON 2 Set the properties for user...

Page 159: ...r the RS485 port the minimum time before the port transmits after receiving data from a host can be set This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after each transmission c ETHERNET NETWORK TOPOLOGY When using more than one Ethernet port configure each to belong to a different network or subnet using the IP addresses and mask else communication b...

Page 160: ...e LAN2 is 11 x x x 255 0 0 0 IP3 Mask3 12 1 1 2 255 0 0 0 where LAN3 is 12 x x x 255 0 0 0 Example 3 Incorrect IP1 Mask1 10 1 1 2 255 0 0 0 IP2 Mask2 10 2 1 2 255 0 0 0 IP3 Mask3 10 3 1 2 255 0 0 0 This example is incorrect because the mask of 255 0 0 0 used for the three IP addresses makes them belong to the same network of 10 x x x Single LAN No Redundancy The topology shown in the following fig...

Page 161: ...ided through LAN2 and LAN3 to which P2 and respectively P3 are connected and configured to work in redundant mode In this configuration P3 uses the IP and MAC address of P2 Figure 5 4 MULTIPLE LANS WITH REDUNDANCY Multiple LANS No Redundancy The following topology provides local configuration monitoring through EnerVista software on LAN1 to which port 1 P1 is connected access to the public network...

Page 162: ...P was purchased the options are None Failover and PRP If a license for PRP was not purchased the available options are None and Failover In non redundant mode REDUNDANCY set to None ports 2 and 3 operate independently with their own MAC IP and mask addresses If REDUNDANCY is set to Failover the operation of ports 2 and 3 is as follows Ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address IP address and mask Th...

Page 163: ...ANCY PROTOCOL PRP The Parallel Redundancy Protocol PRP defines a redundancy protocol for high availability in substation automation net works It applies to networks based on Ethernet technology ISO IEC 8802 3 and is based on the second edition July 2012 of the IEC 62439 3 clause 4 PRP is designed to provide seamless recovery in case of a single failure in the network by using a combination of LAN ...

Page 164: ...figured The default route is used as the last choice when no other route towards a given destination is found ADDING AND DELETING STATIC ROUTES Host routes are not supported at present The routing table configuration is available on the serial port and front panel This is a deliberate decision to avoid loss of connectivity when remotely configuring the UR By default the value of the destination fi...

Page 165: ...tion RtDestination 10 1 1 0 Rt Mask 255 255 255 0 Example of bad configuration RtDestination 10 1 1 1 Rt Mask 255 255 255 0 ROUTING BEHAVIOR COMPARED TO PREVIOUS RELEASES Prior to release 7 10 the UR did not have an explicit manner of configuring routes The only available route was the default route configured as part of the network settings port gateway IP address This limited the ability to rout...

Page 166: ...ifferent gateway 10 1 2 1 than the default route This gate way is the address of Router 2 which has knowledge about 10 1 3 0 and is able to route packets coming from UR and des tined to EnerVista SHOW ROUTES AND ARP TABLES This feature is available on the Web interface where the main menu contains an additional Communications menu and two submenus Routing Table ARP Table The tables outline the inf...

Page 167: ...t when the L90 is restarted h DNP PROTOCOL PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL DNP PROTOCOL DNP CHANNELS Range see sub menu below MESSAGE DNP ADDRESS 1 Range 0 to 65519 in steps of 1 MESSAGE DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES Range see sub menu below MESSAGE DNP TCP UDP PORT NUMBER 20000 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 MESSAGE DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disable...

Page 168: ... to 100000000 in steps of 1 MESSAGE DNP PF DEFAULT DEADBAND 30000 Range 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1 MESSAGE DNP OTHER DEFAULT DEADBAND 30000 Range 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1 MESSAGE DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD 1440 min Range 1 to 10080 min in steps of 1 MESSAGE DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE 240 Range 30 to 2048 in steps of 1 MESSAGE DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION 2 Range 1 2 MESSAGE DNP OBJECT 2 DEFAU...

Page 169: ...r example a value of 72000 V on the L90 will be returned as 72 These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within cer tain ranges in DNP masters Note that a scale factor of 0 1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 that is the value will be 10 times larger The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input data The...

Page 170: ...dress The DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections If there is no data traffic on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting the connection will be aborted by the L90 This frees up the connection to be re used by a client Relay power must be re cycled after changing the DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setti...

Page 171: ... not take effect until the L90 is restarted j IEC 61850 PROTOCOL PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL The L90 Line Current Differential System is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications capability This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering Refer to the Ordering section of chap ter 2 for additional details ANALOG INPUT MME POINTS Point 0 ...

Page 172: ...E TIME sets the time between GSSE or GOOSE messages when there are no remote out put state changes to be sent When remote output data changes GSSE or GOOSE messages are sent immediately This setting controls the steady state heartbeat time interval The DEFAULT GSSE GOOSE UPDATE TIME setting is applicable to GSSE fixed L90 GOOSE and configurable GOOSE The GSSE settings are shown below PATH SETTINGS...

Page 173: ...previous to 5 0x the destination Ethernet MAC address was determined automatically by taking the sending MAC address that is the unique local MAC address of the L90 and setting the multicast bit The GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE messages This allows GOOSE messages to have higher priority than other Ethernet data The GOOSE ETYPE APPID setting allows the select...

Page 174: ...asets 1 through 8 the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre configured rate even if no changes in the data items are detected The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE mes sages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message The L90 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of t...

Page 175: ...ion required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices The general steps required for transmission configuration are 1 Configure the transmission dataset 2 Configure the GOOSE service settings 3 Configure the data The general steps required for reception configuration are 1 Configure the reception dataset 2 Configure the GOOSE service settings 3 Configure the data Table 5 3 GOOSE RETRAN...

Page 176: ...and must match the configuration on the receiver the default value is 0 Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7 2 For this example it can be left at its default value 3 Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTO COL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION settings menu Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 ...

Page 177: ...mined by the GGIO1 ST Ind1 stVal value in the sending device The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a com plete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software For intercommunication between L90 IEDs the fixed DNA UserSt dataset can be used The DNA UserSt dataset contains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in ...

Page 178: ...ese two data items The Boolean status values from these data items can be utilized as remote input FlexLogic operands First the REMOTE DEVICE 1 16 DATASET setting must be set to contain dataset GOOSEIn 1 that is the first configurable dataset Then REMOTE IN 1 16 ITEM settings must be set to Dataset Item 1 and Dataset Item 2 These remote input FlexLogic operands will then change state in accordance...

Page 179: ...e changes to the IEC MMS TCP PORT NUMBER setting take effect when the L90 is restarted The SERVER SCANNING feature should be set to Disabled when IEC 61850 client server functionality is not required IEC 61850 has two modes of functionality GOOSE GSSE inter device communication and client server communication If the GOOSE GSSE functionality is required without the IEC 61850 client server feature t...

Page 180: ...band values used to determine when the update the MMXU mag and cVal values from the associated instmag and instcVal values The mag and cVal values are used for the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reports These settings correspond to the associated db data items in the CF functional con straint of the MMXU logical node as per the IEC 61850 standard According to IEC 61850 7 3 the db value shall re...

Page 181: ...d to control the L90 virtual inputs The GGIO4 analog configuration points are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION The NUMBER OF ANALOG POINTS setting determines how many analog data points will exist in GGIO4 When this value is changed the L90 must be rebooted in order to allow the GGIO4 logical node to be re instantiated and contain...

Page 182: ...s not all values can be stored Some values may be rounded to the closest possible floating point number The GGIO5 integer configuration points are shown below PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GGIO5 ANALOG CONFIGURATION The GGIO5 logical node allows IEC 61850 client access to integer data values This allows access to as many as 16 unsigned integer value points associate...

Page 183: ...to a value from the list of IEC 61850 data attributes supported by the L90 Changes to the dataset will only take effect when the L90 is restarted It is recommended to use reporting service from logical node LLN0 if a user needs some but not all data from already existing GGIO1 GGIO4 and MMXU4 points and their quantity is not greater than 64 minus the number items in this dataset REPORT 1 DATASET I...

Page 184: ...n can result in very large OpCnt values over time This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to 0 for XCBR1 XCBR CONFIGURATION XCBR1 ST LOC OPERAND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE XCBR6 ST LOC OPERAND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt No Range No Yes MESSAGE CLEAR XCBR6 OpCnt No Range No Yes MESSAGE XCBR1 SYNCCHECK CLS Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE XCBR6 SYNCCHECK CLS ...

Page 185: ...plete details on these control models The XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout setting is used to select SBO timeout value To be successful the IEC 61850 operate com mand must be executed after the select command within the XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout setting value The disconnect switch configuration settings are shown below Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is restarted PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SET...

Page 186: ...e port is set to 0 the change takes effect when the L90 is restarted l TFTP PROTOCOL PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS TFTP PROTOCOL The Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP can be used to transfer files from the L90 over a network The L90 operates as a TFTP server TFTP client software is available from various sources including Microsoft Windows NT The dir txt file obtained from the L90 c...

Page 187: ...enever power is removed and re applied to the L90 the default thresholds are in effect The IEC REDUNDANCY setting decides whether multiple client connections are accepted or not If redundancy is set to Yes two simultaneous connections can be active at any given time When the IEC port number is set to 0 the change takes effect when the L90 is restarted The IEC 60870 5 104 and DNP protocols cannot b...

Page 188: ...initial register means none and values of 0 display for all registers Different ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions 5 2 7 REAL TIME CLOCK a MAIN MENU PATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP REAL TIME CLOCK IEC NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES CLIENT ADDRESS 1 0 0 0 0 Range Standard IPV4 address format MESSAGE CLIENT ADDRESS 2 0 0 0 0 Range Standard IPV4 address format MESSAGE CL...

Page 189: ...ATH SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP REAL TIME CLOCK The relay contains a real time clock RTC to create timestamps for communications protocols as well as for historical data such as event records and oscillography When the relay restarts the RTC initializes from an onboard battery backed clock which has the same accuracy as an electronic watch approximately 1 minute per month 23 ppm Once the RTC is synchro...

Page 190: ...cks and switches PP specifies a worst case delivered time error of less than 1 µs over a 16 hop network In a PTP system and in a PP system the clocks automatically organize themselves into a master slave synchronization hierarchy with the best clock available making itself the grandmaster at the top of the hierarchy all others make them selves slaves and track the grandmaster Typically the grandma...

Page 191: ...In unusual cases where the length of the link is different in different directions this setting should be set to the number of nanoseconds the Ethernet propagation delay to the relay is longer than the mean of path propagation delays to and from the relay For instance if it is known say from the physical length of the fibers and the propagation speed in the fibers that the delay from the relay to ...

Page 192: ...ed product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time Unicast SNTP is supported The UR series relays do not support the broadcast multicast or anycast SNTP functionality The SNTP FUNCTION setting enables or disabled the SNTP feature on the L90 To use SNTP SNTP SERVER IP ADDR must be set to the SNTP NTP server IP address Once this address is set and SNTP FUNCTION is Enabled the L90 attempts t...

Page 193: ... late UTC from the local time these provide When the RTC is synchronized with a communications protocol providing only UTC such as PTP or SNTP the time offset setting is used to determine local time from the UTC provided PTP ALTERNATE_TIME_OFFSET_INDICATOR TLVs are not used to calculate local time When a communications protocol other than PTP provides UTC to local time offset meaning IRIG B that o...

Page 194: ... MESSAGE FAULT REPORT 1 TRIG Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 MAG 3 00 Range 0 01 to 250 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 ANGLE 75 Range 25 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 MAG 9 00 Range 0 01 to 650 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 ANGLE 75 Range 25 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE FAULT REPORT 1 LINE LENGTH UNITS km Range km miles ...

Page 195: ...ally provided neutral voltage broken delta VT connected to the auxiliary voltage channel of a VT bank or by the zero sequence voltage approximated as a voltage drop developed by the zero sequence current and user provided zero sequence equivalent impedance of the system behind the relay The trigger can be any FlexLogic operand but in most applications it is expected to be the same operand usually ...

Page 196: ...signal is labeled differently If the broken delta neutral voltage is not available to the relay an approximation is possible by assuming the missing zero sequence voltage to be an inverted voltage drop produced by the zero sequence current and the user specified equivalent zero sequence system impedance behind the relay V0 Z0 I0 In order to enable this mode of operation the FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBST...

Page 197: ...c parameter element state contact input virtual output etc The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals that is current and voltage are stored Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored This setting has no effect on the internal sampling rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle...

Page 198: ... be quite time consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad and display entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed All eight CT VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file The CT VT module channels are named as follows slot_letter terminal_number I or V phase A B or C or 4th input The fourth current input in...

Page 199: ... log DATA LOGGER DATA LOGGER MODE Continuous Range Continuous Trigger MESSAGE DATA LOGGER TRIGGER Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE DATA LOGGER RATE 60000 ms Range 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1 MESSAGE DATA LOGGER CHNL 1 Off Range Off any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list MESSAGE DATA LOGGER CHNL 2 Off Range Off any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A F...

Page 200: ...e tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display It can be quite time consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad display entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed DATA LOGGER CONFIG This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not selected to O...

Page 201: ...ses Each new value of demand becomes available at the end of each pulse Assign a FlexLogic operand to the DEMAND TRIGGER setting to program the input for the new demand interval pulses If no trigger is assigned in the DEMAND TRIGGER setting and the CRNT DEMAND METHOD is Block Interval use cal culating method 2 If a trigger is assigned the maximum allowed time between 2 trigger signals is 60 minute...

Page 202: ...stage can be interrupted at any time 3 All the LEDs are turned on One LED at a time turns off for 1 second then back on The test routine starts at the top left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point This stage can be interrupted at any time When testing is in progres...

Page 203: ...ly start stage 2 At this point forward test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2 Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are burned as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures This is to be performed via user programmable pushbutton 1 After applying the settings in application example 1 hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs Ne...

Page 204: ...programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs If the LED 1 TYPE setting is Self Reset the default setting the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand If the LED 1 TYPE setting is Latched the LED once lit remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button from a remote device via a communica tions channel or from any programmed operand eve...

Page 205: ... standard control pushbuttons labeled USER 1 USER 2 and USER 3 on the standard and enhanced front panels These are user programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test switching setting groups and invoking and scrolling though user programmable displays Firmware revisions 3 2x and older use these three pushbuttons for manual breaker control This functionality h...

Page 206: ...s logged in the event record as per user setting when a control pushbutton is pressed No event is logged when the pushbutton is released The faceplate keys including control keys cannot be operated simultaneously a given key must be released before the next one can be pressed The control pushbuttons become user programmable only if the breaker control feature is not configured for manual control v...

Page 207: ...s The user programmable pushbuttons are under the control level of password protection The user configurable pushbuttons for the enhanced faceplate are shown below USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Self Reset Latched Disabled MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT Range Up to 20 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PUSHBTN 1 OFF T...

Page 208: ...ored in non volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control power The pushbutton is reset deactivated in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET set ting or by directly pressing the associated active front panel pushbutton It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST and PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY set tings These settings enable...

Page 209: ...e memory Should the power supply be lost the correct state of the pushbutton is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT This setting specifies the top 20 character line of the user programmable message and is intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton Refer to the User definable displays section for instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the ke...

Page 210: ...ble to the PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting This message can be temporary removed if any front panel keypad button is pressed However ten seconds of keypad inactivity will restore the message if the PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is still active If the PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE is set to Normal the message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings will be displayed as long as PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operan...

Page 211: ...e Lock SETTING Off 0 Local Lock SETTING Off 0 Set SETTING Off 0 Reset SETTING Enabled Disabled Autoreset Function FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF TIMER 200 ms 0 AND AND AND AND AND TIMER 50 ms 0 TIMER 50 ms 0 SETTING Autoreset Delay TPKP 0 TIMER 200 ms 0 AND AND SETTING Drop Out Timer TRST 0 PUSHBUTTON ON To user programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 2 842024A2 ...

Page 212: ...PUSHBUTTON 1 LED LOGIC OR AND AND SETTING Disabled High Priority Message Priority Normal FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON Pushbutton 1 LED SETTING any FlexLogic operand PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL AND SETTING Flash Message Time TRST 0 PUSHBUTTON ON LATCHED LATCHED SELF RESET AND From user programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 1 842021A3 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF SE...

Page 213: ...e display note that only the programmed screens are displayed The screens can be scrolled using the UP and DOWN keys The display disappears after the default message time out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPER TIES DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting USER PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT The user definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL setting Any FlexLogic operand in part...

Page 214: ...ll through the characters A space is selected like a character 4 Press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position 5 Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed 6 The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information 7 Press the ENTER key to store the new settings To enter a numerical value for any of the five items the...

Page 215: ...tify a relay This name will appear on generated reports USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE Current X A Shows user defined text with first tilde marker MESSAGE DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE Current Y A Shows user defined text with second tilde marker MESSAGE DISP 1 ITEM 1 6016 Shows decimal form of user selected Modbus register address corresponding to first tilde marker MESSAGE DISP 1 ITEM 2 6357 Shows decimal f...

Page 216: ...and consists of the following steps Configure the field units This establishes the point to point connection between a specific port on the relay process bus module and a specific digital core on a specific Brick This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus relay Configure the AC banks This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages AC bank c...

Page 217: ...he ground CT primary rating must be entered To detect low level ground fault currents the sensitive ground input may be used In this case the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered Refer to chapter 3 for more details on CT connections Enter the rated CT primary current values For both 1000 5 and 1000 1 CTs the entry would be 1000 For correct opera tion the CT secondary rating must matc...

Page 218: ... voltage which would be 115 66 4 On a 14 4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400 120 the voltage value entered would be 120 that is 14400 120 5 4 2 POWER SYSTEM PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency cannot be measured from available...

Page 219: ...nces consult the factory for special variable frequency applications The frequency tracking feature functions only when the L90 is in the Programmed mode If the L90 is Not Pro grammed then metering values are available but can exhibit significant errors The nominal system frequency should be selected as 50 Hz or 60 Hz only The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting used as a reference for calculati...

Page 220: ...ith the actual AC physical input channels will be dis played here All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of the actual values DISTURBANCE DETECTORS INTERNAL The disturbance detector ANSI 50DD element is a sensitive current disturbance detector that detects any disturbance on the protected system The 50DD function is intended for use in conjunction ...

Page 221: ...g figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application and the CT VT inputs that are used to provide the data Figure 5 19 EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER CT VT MODULE 1 CT VT MODULE 2 CT VT MODULE 3 CTs VTs not applicable Y LV D HV AUX SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 Phase CT M1 F1 F5 None Ground CT M1 None None Phase VT M5 None None Aux VT No...

Page 222: ...ns of current phasors The voltage signals used for charging current compensation are taken from the source assigned with the CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 1 setting As such it s critical to ensure that three phase line voltage is assigned to this source The following diagram shows possible configurations 87L POWER SYSTEM NUMBER OF TERMINALS 2 Range 2 3 MESSAGE NUMBER OF CHANNELS 1 Range 1 2 MESSAGE C...

Page 223: ...e line are different the following equations apply 1 For 2 terminal line 2 For 3 terminal line Xreact_n the total neutral reactor inductive reactance If identical reactors are installed at both line ends the value of the inductive reactance is divided by 2 or 3 for a three terminal line before using in the above equations If the reactors installed at both ends of the line are different the followi...

Page 224: ... Precision Time Protocol or IRIG B Use this feature on multiplexed channels where channel asymmetry can be expected and which otherwise causes errors in current dif ferential calculations The feature takes effect if all terminals are provided with reliable GPS clock signals If the GPS clock signal is lost at any terminal of the current differential protection system or the real time clock not conf...

Page 225: ... before locking to satellites If the receiver s failsafe contact opens during power up allowing for an erroneous IRIG B signal then set a dropout delay up to 15 minutes depending on GPS receiver specifications to the failsafe contact via FlexLogic to prevent incorrect relay response MAX CHNL ASYMMETRY This setting detects excessive channel asymmetry The same threshold is applied to both the channe...

Page 226: ...e SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT DIFF CT TAP setting should be used It is important to properly program the in zone transformer setting for all terminals to ensure correct 87L performance IN ZONE TRANSFORMER CONNECTION This setting is used to indicate the presence and group connection of the in zone transformer The winding angle ...

Page 227: ...o disables ground differential 87LG functionality and zero sequence current removal functionality defined by the ZERO SEQ CURRENT REMOVAL setting TRANSFORMER LOCATION This setting selects the transformer location and is applicable only if the TRANSFORMER CONNECTION setting is not programmed as None Select the LOCAL TAP value if the transformer is present between the local terminal and the tap poin...

Page 228: ... CLOSE Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 A 3P CLSD Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 A 3P OPND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 B CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 B OPENED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 C CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 C OPENED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BREAKER 1 Toperate 0 070 ...

Page 229: ...ve is used to track phase A and the BREAKER 1 B and BREAKER 1 C settings select operands to track phases B and C respectively BREAKER 1 A 3P OPND This setting selects an operand usually a contact input that should be a normally closed 52 b status input to create a logic 1 when the breaker is open If a separate 52 b contact input is not available then the inverted BREAKER 1 CLOSED status signal can...

Page 230: ...erential System GE Multilin 5 4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS 5 Figure 5 23 DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC Sheet 1 of 2 IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the L90 is in Programmed mode and not in the local control mode NOTE ...

Page 231: ...pen close operation of each breaker using either CSWI or XCBR IEC 61850 logical nodes IEC 61850 select before operate functionality local remote switch functionality along with a blocking of open close commands are provided Note that IEC 61850 commands are event driven and dwell time for these is one protection pass only If you want to main tain the close open command for a certain time do so eith...

Page 232: ...ated to disconnect switch 1 SWITCH 1 MODE This setting selects 3 Pole mode where disconnect switch poles have a single common auxiliary switch or 1 Pole mode where each disconnect switch pole has its own auxiliary switch SWITCH 1 SWITCH 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE SWITCH 1 NAME SW 1 Range up to 6 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE SWITCH 1 MODE 3 Pole Range 3 Pole 1 Pole MESSAG...

Page 233: ...input to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open If a separate 89 b contact input is not available then an inverted 89 a status signal can be used SWITCH 1 B CLOSED If the mode is selected as three pole this setting has no function If the mode is selected as single pole this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as above for phase A SWITCH 1 B OPENED If t...

Page 234: ...5 96 L90 Line Current Differential System GE Multilin 5 4 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS 5 Figure 5 25 DISCONNECT SWITCH SCHEME LOGIC ...

Page 235: ...0 00 to 0 98 and 1 03 to 20 00 This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points To enter a custom FlexCurve enter the reset and operate times using the VALUE keys for each selected pickup point using the MESSAGE UP DOWN keys for the desired protection curve A B C or D FLEXCURVE A FLEXCURVE A TIME AT 0 00 xPKP 0 ms Range 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 Table...

Page 236: ...with a minimum response time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples There are 41 recloser curve types supported These definite oper ating times are useful to coordinate operating times typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream pro tective devices have different operating characteristics The recloser curve configuration window shown below appears when the Initializ...

Page 237: ...00 ms see below Figure 5 27 COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED With the HCT feature enabled the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup Figure 5 28 COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed If this is attempted the EnerVista UR Setup software g...

Page 238: ...LOSER CURVES GE113 GE120 GE138 AND GE142 GE104 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE101 GE102 GE103 GE106 GE105 842723A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE113 GE142 GE138 GE120 842725A1 CDR ...

Page 239: ...51 AND GE201 Figure 5 32 RECLOSER CURVES GE131 GE141 GE152 AND GE200 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE134 GE151 GE140 GE137 GE201 842730A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE131 GE200 GE152 GE141 842728A1 CDR ...

Page 240: ...VES GE116 GE117 GE118 GE132 GE136 AND GE139 842729A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE133 GE163 GE162 GE161 GE165 GE164 842726A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE116 GE132 GE118 GE117 GE139 GE136 ...

Page 241: ...122 Figure 5 36 RECLOSER CURVES GE119 GE135 AND GE202 842724A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE121 GE114 GE112 GE122 GE107 GE115 GE111 842727A1 CDR 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 CURRENT multiple of pickup TIME sec GE119 GE202 GE135 ...

Page 242: ...toring protection operation and control can be realized if Synchrophasors from different locations within the power system are networked to a central location The L90 offers PMU features over two communication standards IEC61850 9 5 and C37 118 The complete Synchropha sor implementation for Firmware version 7 0 is shown in the figure below Figure 5 37 COMPLETE SYNCHROPHASOR IMPLEMENTATION UR Imple...

Page 243: ...1850 90 5 is selected all real and virtual sources are available for the IEC61850 90 5 PMUs Firmware version 7 0 allows the N60 to support a maximum of four Logical Device PMUs Logical Device 2 through 5 and four aggregators located in Logical Device 1 LD1 while other UR family members support one PMU and only one aggregator The control blocks for the aggregators are located in LD1 A 64 char LDNam...

Page 244: ...r the aggregator inherits the Sample Rate SmpRate and C37 118 Class P or M of that PMU The value of the SmpRate DO in the Report Control Block is set based on the value of the Sample Rate in the PMU The Class of the Dataset are mapped into the MSVID of the Dataset see text below for the overall name of the MSVID If other PMUs are mapped into the same aggregator with different Sample Rates or from ...

Page 245: ...s the maximum size of each PMU data set for version 7 0 using FCDA data non structured data EXAMPLE PROTECTION SYNCHROPHASORS DATA SET WITH REPORTING RATE 60 FRAMES SECOND This example gives the protection synchrophasors data set with a reporting rate of 60 frames per second P60MMXU1 See figure above Logical Nodes Supported in Each Logical Device This data or list of items see figure below is not ...

Page 246: ...GURATION USING IEC61850 90 5 The L90 is expected to send the CFG 2 file IEEE C37 118 config file upon request from the upstream synchrophasor devices e g P30 without stopping R SV multicasting see figure below The primary domain controller PDC does not need to use a stop start data stream command if the UR protocol is set to IEC61850 90 5 prior to requesting the configura tion via CFG 2 IEEE C37 1...

Page 247: ...nformation via the CFG 2 file for a given aggregator when the aggregator is set to 90 5 the version number of the CFG 2 file found in bits 0 3 of the frame SYNC word which should presently be set to 2 is set as follows The PMU settings are organized in four logical groups as follows PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1 VALUE DECIMAL OF ASDUS 11 1 12 2 13 3 1...

Page 248: ...c MESSAGE 37 118 PMU 1 CONFIGURATION See below MESSAGE 90 5 PMU 1 CONFIGURATION See below MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 1 Off Range Available synchrophasor values Default Off MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 1 NAME GE UR PMU PHS 1 Range 16 character ASCII string Default GE UR PMU PHS 1 MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 14 Off Range Available synchrophasor values Default Off MESSAGE PMU 1 PHS 14 NAME GE UR PMU PHS 14 Range 16 character ASCI...

Page 249: ...t A B C and ground channels of the source as well as symmetrical components 0 1 and 2 of both voltages and currents When configuring communication and recording features of the PMU the user could select from the above superset the content to be sent out or recorded When one source is selected by one PMU it cannot be selected by another PMU PMU 1 CLASS Range P M None This setting selects the synchr...

Page 250: ...ing units PMU1 A CH 1 NM to PMU1 A CH 16 NM These settings allow for custom naming of the analog channels Sixteen character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame PMU1 D CH 1 to PMU1 D CH 16 These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user selectable digital channel of the data frame Up to sixteen digital channels can be con...

Page 251: ...RT PHS 14 PMU 1 V1 Range available synchrophasor values MESSAGE PMU1 PORT PHS 14 NM GE UR PMU1 V1 Range 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PMU1 PORT A CH 1 Off Range available FlexAnalog values MESSAGE PMU1 PORT A CH 1 NM AnalogChannel1 Range 16 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE PMU1 PORT A CH 8 Off Range available FlexAnalog values MESSAGE PMU1 PORT A CH 8 NM AnalogChannel8 Range 16 alphanumeric ch...

Page 252: ... PORT D CH 1 to PMU1 PORT D CH 16 These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user selectable digital channel of the data frame Up to sixteen digital channels can be configured to send any FlexLogic operand from the relay The configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchropha sor instant These values are mapped into a two byte integer number...

Page 253: ...nnected to the PMU recorder Each trigger can be programmed to log its operation into the event recorder and to signal its operation via targets The five triggers drive the STAT bits of the data frame to inform the destination of the synchrophasor data regarding the cause of trigger The following convention is adopted to drive bits 11 3 2 1 and 0 of the STAT word Figure 5 43 STAT BITS LOGIC e USER ...

Page 254: ...mparator applies a 0 03 Hz hysteresis PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to nor mal This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode recording as long as th...

Page 255: ... setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger in per unit of the PMU source 1 pu is a nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio The comparator applies a 3 hysteresis PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME This se...

Page 256: ...ng as the trig gering condition is asserted PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP 1 800 pu Range 0 100 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME 0 10 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 CURR TRI...

Page 257: ...VT ratio and the nominal primary current For the three phase power 1 pu is three times that for a sin gle phase power The comparator applies a 3 hysteresis PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE 1 250 pu Range 0 250 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE 1 250 pu Range 0 250 to 3 000 pu in step...

Page 258: ...condition is asserted Figure 5 47 POWER TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC 847003A1 CDR SETTINGS PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FUNCTION Enabled 1 PMU 1 PWR TRIG BLK Off 0 AND SETTINGS PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE RUN SETTINGS PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME tPKP tDPO FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGE...

Page 259: ...er in the forced mode recording as long as the trig gering condition is asserted Figure 5 48 RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER RAISE 0 25 Hz s Range 0 10 to 15 00 Hz s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 df dt TRIGGER FALL 0 25 Hz s Range 0 10 to 15 00 Hz s in steps of 0 01 MESSAG...

Page 260: ...ount of pre trigger data as a percent of the entire record This setting applies only to the timed mode of recording l AGGREGATORS PATH SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT PMU AGGREGATOR 1 When the protocol selection is set via the software or keypad all aggregators whose protocol is not set to None will be set to the last protocol saved i e C37 118 or IEC61850 90 5 to any aggregators as ...

Page 261: ...originating at the PDC to be executed on the PMU The control is accomplished via an extended command frame The relay decodes the first word of the extended field EXTFRAME to drive 16 dedicated FlexLogic operands Each aggregator supports 16 FlexLogic operands as shown in table 2 The operands are asserted for 5 seconds following reception of the command frame If the new command frame arrives within ...

Page 262: ...R2 PDC CNTRL 3 Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 3 as received via the network as above AGTR1 PDC CNTRL 16 Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 16 as received via the network Table 5 10 OF ASDU SETTINGS FOR OF ASDU TRANSMISSION 1 ASDU at T0 current values 2 ASDU at T 1 previous values ASDU at T0 current values 3 values ASDU at T 2 previous values ASDU at T 1 previous ASDU at T0 ...

Page 263: ...the stream On or Off on power up or re boot MSVCB 1 CONFREV The Configuration revision is incremented by the relay every time the configuration is changed This setting allows the user to reset the configuration back to 1 or a value from 1 to 4294967295 MSVCB 1 PRIORITY A value from 0 through 7 The default value is 4 MSVCB 1 IP Class The value represents the IPv4 Differentiated Services formerly ca...

Page 264: ...ETWORK PDC CONTROL The synchrophasor standard allows for user defined controls originating at the PDC to be executed on the PMU The control is accomplished via an extended command frame The relay decodes the first word of the extended field EXTFRAME to drive 16 dedicated FlexLogic operands PDC NETWORK CNTRL 1 from the least significant bit to PDC NETWORK CNTRL 16 from the most significant bit Othe...

Page 265: ... a contact output The state of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided If a simple scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is desired this selection is made when programming the element This capability also applies to the other features that set flags elements virtual inputs remote inputs schemes and human operators ...

Page 266: ...IS 1 ON IF Contact Input On Cont Ip On Voltage is presently applied to the input external contact closed Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is presently not applied to the input external contact open Contact Output type Form A contact only Current On Cont Op 1 Ion Current is flowing through the contact Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact Voltage Off Cont Op 1 VOff Voltage does not exis...

Page 267: ... has been received Direct transfer trip is keyed Phase and frequency lock loop PFLL has failed Channel asymmetry greater than 1 5 ms detected Channel 1 has failed Channel 2 has failed Exceeded maximum lost packet threshold on channel 1 Exceeded maximum lost packet threshold on channel 2 Exceeded maximum CRC error threshold on channel 1 Exceeded maximum CRC error threshold on channel 2 The ID check...

Page 268: ...ated AUX UV2 to AUX UV3 Same set of operands as shown for AUX UV1 ELEMENT Breaker flashover BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP A BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP B BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP C BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP A BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP B BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP C BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO A BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO B BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO C BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO Breaker 1 flashover element phase A has picked up Breaker 1 flashover element ...

Page 269: ...set of operands as shown for BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 ELEMENT Continuous monitor CONT MONITOR PKP CONT MONITOR OP Continuous monitor has picked up Continuous monitor has operated ELEMENT CT fail CT FAIL PKP CT FAIL OP CT fail has picked up CT fail has dropped out ELEMENT Digital counters Counter 1 HI Counter 1 EQL Counter 1 LO Digital counter 1 output is more than comparison value Digital counter 1 outp...

Page 270: ...e pickup operated from overreaching zone 2 when reclosing the line zone 1 extension functionality ELEMENT Load encroachment LOAD ENCHR PKP LOAD ENCHR OP LOAD ENCHR DPO Load encroachment has picked up Load encroachment has operated Load encroachment has dropped out ELEMENT Negative sequence directional overcurrent NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV NEG SEQ DIR OC2 FWD NEG SEQ DIR OC2 REV Negat...

Page 271: ...R1 BLK Phase A directional 1 block Phase B directional 1 block Phase C directional 1 block Phase directional 1 block PH DIR2 Same set of operands as shown for PH DIR1 ELEMENT Phase distance PH DIST Z1 PKP PH DIST Z1 OP PH DIST Z1 OP AB PH DIST Z1 OP BC PH DIST Z1 OP CA PH DIST Z1 PKP AB PH DIST Z1 PKP BC PH DIST Z1 PKP CA PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA PH DIST Z1 DPO A...

Page 272: ... overcurrent 1 has operated Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out PHASE TOC2 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1 ELEMENT Phase undervoltage PHASE UV1 PKP PHASE UV1 OP PHASE UV...

Page 273: ...wing blocking condition has been established ELEMENT Restricted ground fault RESTD GND FT1 PKP RESTD GND FT1 OP RESTD GND FT1 DPO Restricted ground fault 1 has picked up Restricted ground fault 1 has operated Restricted ground fault 1 has dropped out RESTD GND FT2 to FT4 Same set of operands as shown for RESTD GND FT1 ELEMENT Selector switch SELECTOR 1 POS Y SELECTOR 1 BIT 0 SELECTOR 1 BIT 1 SELEC...

Page 274: ...ontacts Disconnect switch 1 phase B intermediate status is detected transition from one position to another Disconnect switch 1 phase C is closed Disconnect switch 1 phase C is open Disconnect switch 1 phase C bad status is detected discrepancy between the 52 a and 52 b contacts Disconnect switch 1 phase C intermediate status is detected transition from one position to another Disconnect switch 1 ...

Page 275: ...VOff Cont Op 2 VOff will not appear unless ordered will not appear unless ordered INPUTS OUTPUTS Direct input Direct I P 1 1 On Direct I P 1 8 On appears only when an inter relay communications card is used appears only when inter relay communications card is used Direct I P 2 1 On Direct I P 2 8 On appears only when inter relay communications card is used appears only when inter relay communicati...

Page 276: ...CE 3 Off REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off Flag is set logic 1 Flag is set logic 1 Flag is set logic 1 Flag is set logic 1 RESETTING RESET OP RESET OP COMMS RESET OP OPERAND RESET OP PUSHBUTTON Reset command is operated set by all three operands below Communications source of the reset command Operand assigned in the INPUTS OUTPUTS RESETTING menu source of the reset command Reset key pushbutton source of the r...

Page 277: ...ic gates are tabulated below and the operators available in FlexLogic are listed in the Flex Logic operators table USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS PUSHBUTTON 1 ON PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF ANY PB ON Pushbutton number 1 is in the On position Pushbutton number 1 is in the Off position Any of twelve pushbuttons is in the On position PUSHBUTTON 2 to 12 Same set of operands as PUSHBUTTON 1 Table 5 13 FLEXLOGIC GA...

Page 278: ...ifies the last entry in the list of processed FlexLogic parameters One shot POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge A one shot refers to a single input gate that generates a pulse in response to an edge on the input The output from a one shot is True positive for only one pass through the FlexLogic equation There is a maximum of 64 one shots NEGATIVE ONE SHOT One shot tha...

Page 279: ...D 16 17 through 25 to AND 9 and the outputs from these two gates to AND 2 Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator is used as an input to more than one following operator If so the operator output must be assigned as a virtual output For the example shown above the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR...

Page 280: ...ier to start at the out put end of the equation and work back towards the input as shown in the following steps It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top For demonstration the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99 and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn Until accustomed to using FlexLogic it is suggested that a worksheet with a series o...

Page 281: ...he set of parame ters into a logic diagram The result of this process is shown below which is compared to the logic for virtual output 3 dia gram as a check Figure 5 56 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 6 Repeating the process described for virtual output 3 select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4 99 The final output of the equation is virtual output 4 which is parameter Virt Op ...

Page 282: ...n cases where a lot of processing is required to perform logic this may be difficult to achieve but in most cases will not cause problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle The possibility of a problem caused by sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service In the following equation virtual o...

Page 283: ...LOGIC EQUATION EDITOR PATH SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR There are 512 FlexLogic entries available numbered from 1 to 512 with default END entry settings If a Disabled Element is selected as a FlexLogic entry the associated state flag will never be set to 1 The key may be used when editing FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types 5 5 6 FL...

Page 284: ...ION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME FxE1 Range up to 6 alphanumeric characters MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 IN Off Range Off any analog actual value parameter MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 IN Off Range Off any analog actual value parameter MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE Signed Range Signed Absolute MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE Level Range Level Delta MESSAGE FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTIO...

Page 285: ...te Sample applications for the Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both directions monitoring power regardless of its direction or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of decreases The element responds directly to its operating signal as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 IN FLEXELEMENT 1 IN and FLEX EL...

Page 286: ...T 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Over PICKUP HYSTERESIS of PICKUP FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Under PICKUP HYSTERESIS of PICKUP 842705A1 CDR 842706A2 CDR FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Over FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE Signed FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION Over FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE Absolute FlexElement 1 OpSig FLEXE...

Page 287: ... the time interval for the rate of change mode of operation This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta This FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY setting specifies the pickup delay of the element The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting specifies the reset delay of the element Table 5 15 FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS 87L SIGNALS Local IA Mag IB and IC Diff Curr IA Mag IB and IC Terminal 1 IA...

Page 288: ...serted the specified FlexLogic operand resets Latch 1 Figure 5 61 NON VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE N 1 to 16 AND LOGIC LATCH 1 LATCH 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LATCH 1 TYPE Reset Dominant Range Reset Dominant Set Dominant MESSAGE LATCH 1 SET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE LATCH 1 RESET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE LATCH 1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Lat...

Page 289: ...lements section at the beginning of this chap ter 5 6 2 SETTING GROUP PATH SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 Each of the six setting group menus is identical Setting group 1 the default active group automatically becomes active if no other group is active see the Control elements section for additional details SETTING GROUP 1 LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT See page 5 152 MESSAGE LINE PICKUP S...

Page 290: ... MESSAGE CURRENT DIFF SIGNAL SOURCE 4 None Range None SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE CURRENT DIFF BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE CURRENT DIFF PICKUP 0 20 pu Range 0 10 to 4 00 pu in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE CURRENT DIFF CT TAP 1 1 00 Range 0 20 to 5 00 in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE CURRENT DIFF CT TAP 2 1 00 Range 0 20 to 5 00 in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1 30 Range 1 to 50 ...

Page 291: ...erential settings example in the Application of settings chapter for additional details When in zone power transformer is present this setting should be calculated and used by taking into account the in zone power transformer as follows EQ 5 10 In this equation Vprim_rem is primary nominal voltage of the transformer winding at the remote terminal and Vprim_loc is primary nominal voltage of the tra...

Page 292: ...through current at any terminal it is important that the 87L phase segregated differential pickup and slope settings are equal at all ter minals Refer to the Applications of settings chapter for additional details CURRENT DIFF GND PICKUP This setting specifies the pickup threshold for neutral current differential element CURRENT DIFF GND RESTRAINT This setting specifies the bias characteristic for...

Page 293: ...GE Multilin L90 Line Current Differential System 5 155 5 SETTINGS 5 6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 Figure 5 62 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME LOGIC ...

Page 294: ...h to pick up the STUB BUS OPERATE operand disable the local differential and send zero currents to the other terminal s If the bus minimum fault cur rent is above five times the instantaneous overcurrent pickup tests have confirmed that the STUB BUS OPERATE operand always pick up correctly for a stub bus fault and prevents tripping of the remote terminal If minimum stub bus fault current is below ...

Page 295: ...rential System 5 157 5 SETTINGS 5 6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 Figure 5 63 STUB BUS SCHEME LOGIC STUB BUS FUNCTION STUB BUS TRIGGER STUB BUS DISCONNECT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND STUB BUS OP 831012A4 CDR SETTING SETTING SETTING Enabled 1 Off 0 Off 0 AND ...

Page 296: ...ine is being re energized from the local ter minal pickup of an overreaching zone 2 or excessive phase current within eight power cycles after the autorecloser issues a close command results in the LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP FlexLogic operand For security the overcurrent trip is supervised by LINE PICKUP LINE PICKUP FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LINE PICKUP SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range S...

Page 297: ... OR AND AND AND AND AND OR OR OR AND OR 0 8 cycles IC 0 05 pu IA 0 05 pu IB 0 05 pu AND OR AND AND AND OR 10 ms 0 AND AND SETTING Enabled 1 Function SETTING Off 0 Block VAG VAB VBG VBC VCG VCA IC IA IB SETTING Signal Source SETTING Disabled 0 Autoreclose Coordination Bypass FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z2 PKP PH DIST Z2 PKP SETTING Enabled 1 Distance Trip SETTING Off 0 Autoreclose Accelerate FLEXLO...

Page 298: ...stem may experience power swing conditions rotating the voltage and current phasors slowly while the memory voltage is static as frozen at the beginning of the fault Keeping the memory in effect for too long may eventually lead to incorrect operation of the distance functions The distance zones can be forced to become self polarized through the FORCE SELF POLAR setting Any user selected con dition...

Page 299: ...FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 DIR Forward Range Forward Reverse Non directional MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 SHAPE Mho Range Mho Quad MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION None Range None Dy1 Dy3 Dy5 Dy7 Dy9 Dy11 Yd1 Yd3 Yd5 Yd7 Yd9 Yd11 MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION None Range None Dy1 Dy3 Dy5 Dy7 Dy9 Dy11 Yd1 Yd3 Yd5 Yd7 Yd9 Yd11 MESSAGE PHS DIST Z1 REACH 2 00 o...

Page 300: ...ation of the phase distance ele ments Additional details may be found in chapter 8 Theory of operation Although all zones can be used as either instantaneous elements pickup PKP and dropout DPO FlexLogic operands or time delayed elements operate OP FlexLogic operands only zone 1 is intended for the instantaneous under reaching tripping mode Ensure that the Phase VT Secondary Voltage setting see th...

Page 301: ...This setting selects the shape of the phase distance function between the mho and quadrilat eral characteristics The selection is available on a per zone basis The two characteristics and their possible varia tions are shown in the following figures Figure 5 66 DIRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC Figure 5 67 NON DIRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC 837720A1 CDR X R R E A C H RCA DIR RCA DIR...

Page 302: ...ERISTIC Figure 5 69 NON DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL PHASE DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC 837721A1 CDR X R RE AC H RCA DIR RCA DIR COMP LIMIT DIR COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT RGT BLD RCA LFT BLD RCA RGT BLD LFT BLD 837803A1 CDR X R R E AC H RCA COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT RGT BLD RCA LFT BLD RCA RGT BLD LFT BLD R E V R E AC H REV REACH RCA COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT ...

Page 303: ...IMIT 60o X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 60o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 60o X R REACH RCA 90o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 45o DIR COMP LIMIT 90o 837723A1 CDR X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 90o RGT BLD RCA 80o LFT BLD RCA 80o X R X R X R R E A C H RCA 80o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 80o DIR COMP LIMIT 60o RGT BLD RCA 80o LFT BLD RCA 80o REACH RCA 90o COMP LIMIT 90o DIR RCA 4...

Page 304: ... for more details and the Application of settings chapter for information on calcu lating distance reach settings in applications involving power transformers Figure 5 72 APPLICATIONS OF THE PH DIST XFMR VOL CUR CONNECTION SETTINGS PHS DIST Z1 REACH This setting defines the zone reach for the forward and reverse applications In the non direc tional applications this setting defines the forward rea...

Page 305: ...stance characteristic figures PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD This setting defines the left blinder position of the quadrilateral characteristic along the resistive axis of the impedance plane see the Quadrilateral distance characteristic figures The angular position of the blinder is adjustable with the use of the PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA setting This setting applies only to the quadri lateral chara...

Page 306: ...egular current seal in for zone 1 OR OR OR OR AND AND AND AND AND AND 837017A8 CDR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP AB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA OPEN POLE OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SETTING PH DIST Z1 DELAY TPKP 0 TPKP 0 TPKP 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP BC FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP CA PH DIST Z1 OP AB PH DIST Z1 OP BC PH DIST Z1 OP CA FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS P...

Page 307: ...e VTs Delta VTs SETTINGS PH DIST Z1 DIR RUN A B ELEMENT RUN B C ELEMENT RUN C A ELEMENT PH DIST Z1 SHAPE PH DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION PH DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION PH DIST Z1 REACH PH DIST Z1 RCA PH DIST Z1 REV REACH PH DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA PH DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT PH DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD PH DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA PH DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD PH DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA PH DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL TIMER 1...

Page 308: ...steps of 0 01 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 RCA 85 Range 30 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 REV REACH 2 00 Range 0 02 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA 85 Range 30 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 POL CURRENT Zero seq Range Zero seq Neg seq MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 NON HOMOGEN ANG 0 0 Range 40 0 to 40 0 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE GND DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT 90 Range 30 to 9...

Page 309: ...und elements for all zones as entered under the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 DISTANCE menu 2 The MEMORY DURATION setting common for both phase and ground elements for all zones as entered under the SET TINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 DISTANCE menu The common distance settings noted at the start of this section must be properly chosen for correct operation of the ground dist...

Page 310: ...s enabling precise values for tapped non homologous and series compensated lines GND DIST Z1 ZOM Z1 MAG The ground distance elements can be programmed to apply compensation for the zero sequence mutual coupling between parallel lines If this compensation is required the ground current from the parallel line 3I_0 measured in the direction of the zone being compensated must be connected to the groun...

Page 311: ...ive coverage and zone reach are set conservatively Also this setting is more relevant in lower voltage applications such as on distribution lines or cables as compared with high voltage transmission lines This setting applies to both the zone 1 and reverse reactance lines if the zone is set to non directional Refer to chapters 8 and 9 for additional information GND DIST Z1 NON HOMOGEN ANG This set...

Page 312: ...tting specified in the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES menu GND DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL This setting is relevant for applications on series compensated lines or in general if series capacitors are located between the relaying point and a point for which the zone shall not overreach For plain non compensated lines this setting shall be set to zero Otherwise the setting is entered in per unit of the VT ...

Page 313: ...nality Figure 5 81 GROUND DISTANCE ZONES 3 AND HIGHER OP SCHEME 25 1 25 5 IURP WKH RSHQ SROH GHWHFWRU HOHPHQW DQG RQO 2 23 5 1 23 1 32 23 2 23 5 1 1 67 3 3 2 23 5 1 1 67 3 3 2 23 5 1 1 67 3 3 7 0 5 PV PV 7 0 5 PV PV 7 0 5 PV PV 6 77 1 1 67 73 3 6 77 1 1 67 73 3 6 77 1 1 67 73 3 2 23 5 1 1 67 23 2 23 5 1 1 67 23 2 23 5 1 1 67 23 2 23 5 1 1 67 23 2 23 5 1 75 3 5 705 1 7 25 25 25 1 25 1 25 1 1 1 IURP...

Page 314: ...DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT GND DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA TIMER 1 cycle 1 cycle SETTING GND DIST Z1 SUPV RUN IN 0 05 I_1 Pickup FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z1 PKP A GND DIST Z1 DPO A FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z1 PKP B GND DIST Z1 DPO B FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z1 PKP C GND DIST Z1 DPO C FLEXLOGIC O...

Page 315: ...fault decision can be reliably made 837011AL CDR AND AND AND OR Quadrilateral characteristic only AND OR MEMORY V_1 0 80 pu I_1 0 025 pu SETTING Enabled 1 GND DIST Z2 FUNCTION SETTING Off 0 GND DIST Z2 BLK SETTING IA IB DISTANCE SOURCE IC VAG VBG VCG V_1 I_1 Wye VTs SETTINGS GND DIST Z2 ZOM Z1 ANG RUN A ELEMENT RUN B ELEMENT RUN C ELEMENT GND DIST Z2 POL CURRENT GND DIST Z2 NON HOMGEN ANG GND DIST...

Page 316: ... 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT 70 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING FWD RCA 75 Range 40 to 90 in steps of 1 MESSAGE POWER SWING REV REACH 50 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID 60 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH OUT 70 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps...

Page 317: ...ifferently to power swings If tripping is required for faults during power swing condi tions some elements may be blocked permanently using the POWER SWING BLOCK operand and others may be blocked and dynamically unblocked upon fault detection using the POWER SWING UN BLOCK operand MESSAGE POWER SWING OUTER RGT BLD 100 00 Range 0 10 to 500 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD ...

Page 318: ...the outer characteristic If afterwards at any time given the impedance stays within the outer characteristic the locus enters the middle char acteristic but stays outside the inner characteristic for a period of time defined as POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2 latch 2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic If afterwards at any time given the impedance stays within the oute...

Page 319: ...S 5 Figure 5 85 POWER SWING DETECT MHO OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS Figure 5 86 EFFECTS OF BLINDERS ON THE MHO CHARACTERISTICS OUTER M I D D L E I N N E RR E V R C A F W D R C A RE V RE AC H INNER LIM IT ANGLE MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE OUTER LIMIT ANGLE 827843A2 CDR FW D RE AC H R X 842734A1 CDR ...

Page 320: ...onditions The POWER SWING INCOMING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an incoming locus the locus enters the inner characteristic The POWER SWING OUTGOING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an outgoing locus the locus leaving the outer characteristic This operand can be used to count unstable swings and take certain action only after pre defined number o...

Page 321: ...ders and both forward and reverse reach impedances of the quadrilateral characteristics POWER SWING REV REACH This setting specifies the reverse reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner quadrilateral characteristic For a simple system of a line and two equivalent sources this reach should be higher than the positive sequence impedance of the local source Detailed transient stability st...

Page 322: ...terval the impedance locus must spend between the middle and inner characteristics before the second step of the out of step tripping sequence is completed This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for the impedance locus to travel between the two characteristics during the fastest expected power swing POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3 Controls the out of step tripping function only It d...

Page 323: ...RGT BLD POWER SWING SHAPE POWER SWING OUTER RGT BLD POWER SWING FWD REACH POWER SWING SUPV POWER SWING REV RCA POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID POWER SWING MIDDLE LFT BLD POWER SWING INNER LFT BLD POWER SWING FWD RCA POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD POWER SWING FUNCTION POWER SWING SOURCE Enabled 1 V_1 I_1 POWER SWING OUTER POWER SWING MIDDLE POWER SWING INNER 827840A4 CDR AN...

Page 324: ...G SETTING POWER SWING SEAL IN DELAY POWER SWING DELAY 1 RESET POWER SWING DELAY 1 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 2 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 3 PICKUP POWER SWING DELAY 4 PICKUP POWER SWING BLK Off 0 POWER SWING TRIP MODE POWER SWING MODE POWER SWING TRIP POWER SWING TMR2 PKP POWER SWING TMR4 PKP POWER SWING OUTGOING POWER SWING TMR3 PKP POWER SWING INCOMING POWER SWING BLOCK POWER SWING UN BLOCK POWER SW...

Page 325: ...ilateral distance element LOAD ENCROACHMENT LOAD ENCROACHMENT FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT MIN VOLT 0 250 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT REACH 1 00 Range 0 02 to 250 00 ohms in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE 30 Range 5 to 50 in steps of 1...

Page 326: ...f the element as shown in the Load encroachment characteristic diagram This setting should be entered in secondary ohms and be calculated as the pos itive sequence resistance seen by the relay under maximum load conditions and unity power factor LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE This setting specifies the size of the blocking region as shown on the Load encroachment characteristic diagram and applies to the...

Page 327: ...es that the energy capacity has reached 100 a time overcurrent element will operate If less than 100 energy capac ity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98 of the pickup value the variable must be reduced Two methods of this resetting operation are available Instantaneous and Timed The Instan taneous selection is intended for applications wit...

Page 328: ... 780 5 564 4 255 3 416 2 845 2 439 8 0 181 454 76 174 29 174 16 014 10 374 7 419 5 674 4 555 3 794 3 252 10 0 226 817 95 217 36 467 20 017 12 967 9 274 7 092 5 693 4 742 4 065 IEEE VERY INVERSE 0 5 8 090 3 514 1 471 0 899 0 654 0 526 0 450 0 401 0 368 0 345 1 0 16 179 7 028 2 942 1 798 1 308 1 051 0 900 0 802 0 736 0 689 2 0 32 358 14 055 5 885 3 597 2 616 2 103 1 799 1 605 1 472 1 378 4 0 64 716 ...

Page 329: ...80 4 280 3 837 3 528 3 297 3 116 2 971 IEC CURVE B 0 05 1 350 0 675 0 338 0 225 0 169 0 135 0 113 0 096 0 084 0 075 0 10 2 700 1 350 0 675 0 450 0 338 0 270 0 225 0 193 0 169 0 150 0 20 5 400 2 700 1 350 0 900 0 675 0 540 0 450 0 386 0 338 0 300 0 40 10 800 5 400 2 700 1 800 1 350 1 080 0 900 0 771 0 675 0 600 0 60 16 200 8 100 4 050 2 700 2 025 1 620 1 350 1 157 1 013 0 900 0 80 21 600 10 800 5 4...

Page 330: ... 1 488 1 239 1 060 0 926 IAC VERY INVERSE 0 5 1 451 0 656 0 269 0 172 0 133 0 113 0 101 0 093 0 087 0 083 1 0 2 901 1 312 0 537 0 343 0 266 0 227 0 202 0 186 0 174 0 165 2 0 5 802 2 624 1 075 0 687 0 533 0 453 0 405 0 372 0 349 0 331 4 0 11 605 5 248 2 150 1 374 1 065 0 906 0 810 0 745 0 698 0 662 6 0 17 407 7 872 3 225 2 061 1 598 1 359 1 215 1 117 1 046 0 992 8 0 23 209 10 497 4 299 2 747 2 131 ...

Page 331: ...om instanta neous to 600 00 seconds in steps of 10 ms EQ 5 17 EQ 5 18 where T Operate Time sec TDM Multiplier setting I Input Current Ipickup Pickup Current setting TRESET Reset Time in seconds assuming energy capacity is 100 and RESET Timed RECLOSER CURVES The L90 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves Please refer to the FlexCurve section in this chapter for a...

Page 332: ...ally reduced by a voltage restraint feature when enabled This is accom plished via the multipliers Mvr corresponding to the phase phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve see the figure below the pickup level is calculated as Mvr times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting If the voltage restraint feature is disabled the pickup level always remains at the setting value PHASE TOC1 PHASE...

Page 333: ...C1 BLOCK C PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B PHASE TOC1 VOLT RESTRAINT PHASE TOC1 A PKP PHASE TOC1 A DPO PHASE TOC1 A OP PHASE TOC1 B PKP PHASE TOC1 B DPO PHASE TOC1 B OP PHASE TOC1 C PKP PHASE TOC1 C DPO PHASE TOC1 C OP PHASE TOC1 PKP PHASE TOC1 OP PHASE TOC1 SOURCE PHASE TOC1 RESET PHASE TOC1 CURVE PHASE TOC1 PICKUP PHASE TOC1 INPUT IA Seq ABC Seq ACB Set Multiplier Set Multiplier Set Multiplier Set Pickup Mul...

Page 334: ...lays GET 8400A Figure 5 96 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 PICKUP DELAY 0 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PHASE IOC1 RESET DELAY 0 00 s...

Page 335: ...0 or quadrature connection If there is a requirement to supervise overcurrent elements for flows in opposite directions such as can happen through a bus tie breaker two phase directional elements should be programmed with opposite element characteristic angle ECA settings PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1 PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SR...

Page 336: ...to select the source for the operating and polarizing signals The operating current for the phase directional element is the phase current for the selected current source The polar izing voltage is the line voltage from the phase VTs based on the 90 or quadrature connection and shifted in the leading direction by the element characteristic angle ECA PHASE DIR 1 ECA This setting is used to select t...

Page 337: ...EUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC2 See page 5 202 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING SETTING PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION PHASE DIR 1 SOURCE PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK OC WHEN V MEM EXP PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK PHASE DIR 1 ECA PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD PH DIR1 BLK A PH DIR1 BLK B PH DIR1 BLK C PH DIR1 BLK IA No Seq ABC Seq ACB Yes VBC VCB 827078A7 CDR Off...

Page 338: ...on When the element is blocked the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic For example if the element reset characteristic is set to Instan taneous and the element is blocked the time accumulator will be cleared immediately Figure 5 99 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL SOU...

Page 339: ... heavy load conditions Transformation errors of current transformers CTs during double line and three phase faults Switch off transients during double line and three phase faults The positive sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time multiple of pickup The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay single phase injecti...

Page 340: ...ating quantity EQ 5 20 The positive sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero sequence currents resulting from System unbalances under heavy load conditions NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING Voltage Range ...

Page 341: ...ground current When NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT is set to Measured VX one third of this voltage is used in place of V_0 The following figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element The figure below shows the voltage polarized phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault with ECA 90 element characteristic angle centerline of operating charact...

Page 342: ... The zero sequence V_0 or auxiliary voltage V_X accordingly must be greater than 0 02 pu to be validated for use as a polarizing signal If the polarizing signal is invalid neither forward nor reverse indication is given If Current polarizing is selected the element uses the ground current angle connected externally and configured under NEUTRAL OC1 SOURCE for polarization The ground CT must be conn...

Page 343: ...t Set higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection The primary appli cation for the offset impedance is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines In regular applications the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the zero sequence v...

Page 344: ... CURR NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV Measured VX Voltage Calculated V_0 Current Ground Crt IG Zero Seq Crt I_0 Dual NOTE 1 CURRENT POLARIZING IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN RELAYS WITH THE GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CONNECTED TO AN ADEQUATE CURRENT POLARIZING SOURCE 2 GROUND CURRENT CAN NOT BE USED FOR POLARIZATION AND OPERATION SIMULTANEOUSLY 3 POSITIVE SEQUENCE RESTRAINT IS NOT ...

Page 345: ...ection is made the auxiliary channel must be identified by the user as a neutral voltage under the VT bank settings This element operates when the auxil iary voltage is configured as neutral WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 1 WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 VOLT Calculated VN R...

Page 346: ...wing equations A value of 1 pu represents the product of a 1 pu voltage as specified in the overvolt age condition for this element and a 1 pu current as specified in the overcurrent condition for this element WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 ECA This setting adjusts the maximum torque angle of the element The operating power is calculated as EQ 5 21 where indicates complex conjugate By varying the element ch...

Page 347: ...04A1 CDR SETTINGS WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 FUNCTION Enabled 1 AND WATT GND FLT 1 BLK Off 0 SETTINGS WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 SOURCE Neutral In Ground Ig Neutral Vn Auxiliary Vx WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 CURRENT Calculated Measured WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 VOLTAGE Calculated Measured SETTING WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 ECA S V conj I exp j ECA SETTINGS WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 OC PICKUP WATTMETRIC GND FLT 1 OV PICKUP SOP PWR ...

Page 348: ...istic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked the time accumulator will be cleared immediately These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT VT module The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0 02 to 46 times the CT rating Figure 5 105 GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE GROUND T...

Page 349: ...ed to the ground channel of a CT VT module The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0 02 to 46 times the CT rating Figure 5 106 GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE GROUND IOC1 PIC...

Page 350: ...n extends the coverage towards the neutral point see the RGF and Percent Differential Zones of Protection diagram Figure 5 107 RGF AND PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL ZONES OF PROTECTION This protection is often applied to transformers having impedance grounded wye windings The element may also be applied to the stator winding of a generator having the neutral point grounded with a CT installed in the ground...

Page 351: ... fault must be approached with care and is not recommended unless the settings are carefully selected to avoid maloperation due to CT saturation The differential current is produced as an unbalance current between the ground current of the neutral CT IG and the neu tral current derived from the phase CTs IN IA IB IC EQ 5 24 The relay automatically matches the CT ratios between the phase and ground...

Page 352: ...e sequence restraint is removed if the zero sequence component is greater than the positive sequence line 3 or set at the net difference of the two line 2 The raw restraining signal Irest is further post filtered for better performance during external faults with heavy CT satura tion and for better switch off transient control EQ 5 28 where k represents a present sample k 1 represents the previous...

Page 353: ...owing values I_0 0 033 pu 0 I_2 0 033 pu 0 and I_1 1 033 pu 0 Igd abs 3 0 0333 0 05 0 15 pu IR0 abs 3 0 033 0 05 0 05 pu IR2 3 0 033 0 10 pu IR1 1 033 8 0 1292 pu and Igr 0 1292 pu Despite very low fault current level the differential current is above 100 of the restraining current EXAMPLE 5 INTERNAL LOW CURRENT HIGH LOAD SINGLE LINE TO GROUND FAULT WITH NO FEED FROM THE GROUND Given the following...

Page 354: ...the time accumulator is cleared immediately Figure 5 110 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC NEG SEQ TOC1 NEG SEQ TOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC1 CURVE IEEE Mod Inv Range see OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table MESSAGE N...

Page 355: ...e phase faults The positive sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time multiple of pickup The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay single phase injection three phase injection opposite rotation Figure 5 111 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC NEG SEQ IOC1 NEG SEQ IOC1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabl...

Page 356: ...nt magnitude respectively when form ing the element operating quantity EQ 5 30 The positive sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative sequence and zero sequence currents resulting from System unbalances under heavy load conditions Transformation errors of current transformers CTs Fault inception and switch off transients NEG SEQ DIR OC1 NEG SEQ DIR...

Page 357: ...ative sequence directional overcurrent element Table 5 26 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT UNIT Table 5 27 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL UNIT The negative sequence voltage must be greater than 0 02 pu to be validated for use as a polarizing signal If the polarizing signal is not validated neither forward nor reverse indication is given The following figure explains the usage of the voltag...

Page 358: ...ormation on how to calculate this setting In regular applications the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the negative sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small If this is the intent the offset impedance shall not be larger than the negative sequence impedance of the protected circuit Practically it is several times smaller The offset impedance is entered in secondary ohms...

Page 359: ...tion this pickup threshold applies to zero or negative sequence current When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive sequence restraint technique Figure 5 113 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC1 SCHEME LOGIC 827091A7 CDR AND AND AND AND AND OR OR NOTE V_2 is negative sequence voltage I_2 is negative sequence current I_0 is zero sequence current AND SETTING Off ...

Page 360: ...PV PICKUP 1 050 pu Range 0 001 to 30 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 1 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 2 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BF1 USE TIMER 3 Yes Range Yes No MESSAGE BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 ...

Page 361: ...lude other breaker commands that are not indicative of a fault in the protected zone Schemes can be initiated either directly or with current level supervision It is particularly important in any application to decide if a current supervised initiate is to be used The use of a current supervised initiate results in the breaker failure ele ment not being initiated for a breaker that has very little...

Page 362: ...aths provide two levels of current supervision high set and low set that allow the supervision level to change from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faulted circuit to a lower level after resistor insertion The high set detector is enabled after timeout of timer 1 or 2 along with a timer that will enable the low set detector after its delay interval The d...

Page 363: ...nly for three pole tripping schemes BF1 USE TIMER 1 If set to Yes the early path is operational BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status 1 to open from the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit plus a safety margin BF1 USE TIMER 2 If set to Yes the main path is operational BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY Timer...

Page 364: ...pproximately 90 of the resistor current This setting is valid only for three pole breaker failure schemes BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY Sets the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed in This timer must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breake...

Page 365: ...rce SETTING IA IB IC SETTING RUN IC Pickup RUN IA Pickup RUN IB Pickup Initiated phase A to breaker failure single pole logic sheet 2 BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Initiated to breaker failure single pole logic sheet 2 TRIP PHASE C FLEXLOGIC OPERAND Phase Current Supervision Pickup SETTING Initiated phase B to breaker failure single pole logic sheet 2 BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ...

Page 366: ... 77 1 1 QLWLDWHG SKDVH IURP VLQJOH SROH EUHDNHU IDLOXUH ORJLF VKHHW 7LPHU 3LFNXS HOD 6 77 1 1 8VH 7LPHU 6 77 1 6 HV UHDNHU 3RV 3KDVH 3 2II UHDNHU 3RV 3KDVH 2II UHDNHU 3RV 3KDVH 2II UHDNHU 7HVW 2Q 2II 1 QLWLDWHG IURP VLQJOH SROH EUHDNHU IDLOXUH ORJLF VKHHW 7LPHU 3LFNXS HOD 6 77 1 1 1 25 1 25 25 6 77 1 3KDVH XUUHQW L6HW 3LFNXS 581 R6HW 7LPH HOD 6 77 1 6 77 1 3KDVH XUUHQW L6HW 3LFNXS 581 R6HW 7LPH HO...

Page 367: ...GE Multilin L90 Line Current Differential System 5 229 5 SETTINGS 5 6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 Figure 5 118 THREE POLE BREAKER FAILURE INITIATE ...

Page 368: ...5 230 L90 Line Current Differential System GE Multilin 5 6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS 5 Figure 5 119 THREE POLE BREAKER FAILURE TIMERS ...

Page 369: ... Schemes In the event of an undervoltage a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load from its normal source to a standby or emergency power source The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a definite time delay characteristic The definite time curve oper ates when the voltage drops below the pickup level for a specified period of time The time delay is adjustable from 0 to 600 ...

Page 370: ...ase undervoltage The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked a setting of 0 will allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 PHASE UV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PHASE UV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE PHASE UV1 MODE Phase to Ground Range Phase to Ground Phase to Phase ...

Page 371: ...ected VTs or as cal culated from phase to ground wye connected VTs The specific voltages to be used for each phase are shown below PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1 PHASE OV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE PHASE OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 PICKUP 1 000 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE PHASE OV1 PICKUP DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600...

Page 372: ...finite time The source assigned to this element must be configured for a phase VT NEUTRAL OV1 NEUTRAL OV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP 0 300 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE Definite time Range Definite time FlexCurve A FlexCurve B FlexCurve C MESSAGE N...

Page 373: ...rating curve of the undervoltage element The auxiliary undervoltage element can be programmed to use either definite time delay or inverse time delay characteristics The operating characteristics and equations for both definite and inverse time delay are as for the phase undervoltage element AUXILIARY UV1 AUX UV1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE AUX UV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SR...

Page 374: ...d MESSAGE AUX OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE AUX OV1 PICKUP 0 300 pu Range 0 000 to 3 000 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE AUX OV1 PICKUP DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AUX OV1 RESET DELAY 1 00 s Range 0 00 to 600 00 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AUX OV1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AUX OV1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latche...

Page 375: ...ower char acteristic diagram The element responds to the following condition EQ 5 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER 1 DIR POWER 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE DIR POWER 1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE DIR POWER 1 RCA 0 Range 0 to 359 in steps of 1 MESSAGE DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION 0 00 Range 0 to 0 95 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE DIR POWER 1 STG1 SMIN 0 100 pu Range 1 200 to ...

Page 376: ...IR POWER 1 RCA and calibration DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION angles and SMIN is the minimum operating power The operating quantity is displayed in the ACTUAL VALUES METERING SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER 1 2 actual value The element has two independent as to the pickup and delay settings stages for alarm and trip respectively Figure 5 126 DIRECTIONAL POWER CHARACTERISTIC RESTRAIN SMIN RCA CALIBRATION OPER...

Page 377: ...ion angle it allows compensation for any CT and VT angular errors to permit more sensitive settings 3 It allows for required direction in situations when the voltage signal is taken from behind a delta wye connected power transformer and the phase angle compensation is required For example the active overpower characteristic is achieved by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to 0 reactive overpower by setting...

Page 378: ... 10 kA is a primary CT current the source pu quantity is 239 MVA and thus SMIN should be set at 4 MW 239 MVA 0 0167 pu 0 017 pu If the reverse power application is considered RCA 180 and SMIN 0 017 pu The element drops out if the magnitude of the positive sequence current becomes virtually zero that is it drops below the cutoff level DIR POWER 1 STG1 DELAY This setting specifies a time delay for s...

Page 379: ...u for I_0 or I_2 the adaptive level detector output is active and the next highest threshold level is increased 8 cycles later from 0 12 to 0 24 pu in steps of 0 02 pu If the level exceeds 0 24 pu the current adaptive level detector setting remains at 0 24 pu and the output remains active as well as the disturbance detector output when the measured value remains above the current setting When the ...

Page 380: ...e overcurrent fault etc whenever the disturbance detector might reset Output of the disturbance detector will be maintained until the chosen FlexLogic operand resets The user may disable the DD EVENTS setting as the disturbance detector element will respond to any current distur bance on the system which may result in filling the events buffer and possible loss of valuable data Figure 5 129 DISTUR...

Page 381: ...his fea ture The 87L TRIP 1P OP and 87L TRIP 3P OP operands are provided to initiate single pole or three pole autoreclosing If a direct transfer trip DTT is not required for the 87L trip scheme to operate it should be disabled at the remote relay via the GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 LINE DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT CURRENT DIFFEREN TIAL settings menu 87L TRIP FUNCTION This setting is used to enabl...

Page 382: ...PICKUP Ib PICKUP 87L TRIP SEAL IN PICKUP Ic PICKUP SETTING Ia Ib 87L TRIP SOURCE Ic SETTING Enabled 87L TRIP FUNCTION FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 87L DIFF OP A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 87L RECVD DTT A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 87L DIFF OP B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 87L RECVD DTT B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 87L DIFF OP C FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 87L RECVD DTT C SETTING 1 Pole 3 Pole 87L TRIP MODE SETTING Off 87L TRIP FORCE 3 Φ SETTING 50DD SV 8...

Page 383: ... specific protection or control protection element and checking the desired bus box Once the desired element is selected for a specific bus a list of element operate type operands are displayed and can be assigned to a trip bus If more than one operate type operand is required it may be assigned directly from the trip bus menu TRIP BUS 1 TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE ...

Page 384: ... TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output This is typically used when lockout is required or user acknowledgement of the relay response is required TRIP BUS 1 RESET The trip bus output is reset when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted Note that the RESET OP operand is pre wired to the reset gate of the latch As such a reset command the front...

Page 385: ...Setting Group shown as follows On power up or restart the previously selected 61850 SG Level x is re instated Similarly the input to the setting group control in the UR can be designed with Non Volatile latches to achieve the same effect The setting groups menu controls the activation and deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the GROUPED ELEMENTS settings menu The faceplate Sett...

Page 386: ... The SETTING GROUP 1 NAME to SETTING GROUP 6 NAME settings allows the user to assign a name to each of the six settings groups Once programmed this name appears on the second line of the GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 6 menu display The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic equation to receive requests to activate or de activate a particular non default set tings group The following FlexLogic equa...

Page 387: ... FULL RANGE This setting defines the upper position of the selector When stepping up through avail able positions of the selector the upper position wraps up to the lower position position 1 When using a direct three bit control word for programming the selector to a desired position the change would take place only if the control word is within the range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE If the con...

Page 388: ...tor does not accept the change and an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds SELECTOR 1 ACK This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input The pre selected position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand This setting is active only under Acknowledge mode of operation The acknowledging signal must...

Page 389: ...re the selector synchronizes to the position dictated by the three bit control input This operation does not wait for time out or the acknowledging input When the synchronization attempt is unsuccessful that is the three bit input is not available 0 0 0 or out of range then the selector switch output is set to position 0 no output operand selected and an alarm is established SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM T...

Page 390: ... these diagrams T represents a time out setting Figure 5 134 TIME OUT MODE 842737A1 CDR STEP UP 3BIT A0 3BIT A1 3BIT A2 POS 1 POS 2 POS 3 POS 4 POS 5 POS 6 POS 7 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 pre existing position 2 changed to 4 with a pushbutton changed to 1 with a 3 bit input changed to 2 with a pushbutton T T T T changed to 7 with a 3 bit input STP ALARM BIT ALARM ALARM ...

Page 391: ...up it should synchronize the setting group to the three bit control input Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUPS menu SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION Enabled GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SETTING GROUPS BLK Off GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON Off GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 2 GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON Off GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON SELECTOR 1 POS 3 Make th...

Page 392: ...ollowing changes in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION Self reset PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP OUT TIME 0 10 s The logic for the selector switch is shown below Figure 5 136 SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC 842012A2 CDR step up acknowledge 3 bit position out ON FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SELECTOR 1 POS 1 SELECTOR 1 POS 2 SELECTOR 1 POS 3 SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SELECTO...

Page 393: ...T 6 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE TRIP RECLOSE INPUT 1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE TRIP RECLOSE INPUT 2 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE TRIP RECLOSE INPUT 6 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE TRIP SEAL IN DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE TRIP RESET CBaux OR Custom Range Pole Curr OR Custom CBaux OR Custom Custom MESSAGE START TMR Z2PH Inp1 Off Range Fl...

Page 394: ...sed to aggregate inputs from appropriate protection elements including 87L line differential dis tance and instantaneous overcurrent functions to provide single pole tripping The line current differential function is hard wired through the 87L TRIP function which has to be enabled and configured properly The 87L TRIP function collects inputs from both the 87L line differential and 87L DTT function...

Page 395: ...OR gate if more than six inputs are required These inputs also include the TRIP 1 POLE INPUT 1 to TRIP 1 POLE INPUT 6 values which are intended to initiate three pole reclosing in situations where single pole tripping commands are changed to three pole tripping commands This can happen in cases where the phase selector identifies a multi phase fault or the AR FORCE 3P TRIP command is present TRIP ...

Page 396: ...lly result in a spurious three pole operation on a single line to ground internal fault Delaying tripping on internal faults that follow detection of reverse faults solves the problem As long as the operand indicated under this setting is asserted the trip action is delayed by TRIP DELAY ON EVOLV FAULTS time Typically this operand should combine reverse zone indications such as zone 4 pickup with ...

Page 397: ...GE Multilin L90 Line Current Differential System 5 259 5 SETTINGS 5 7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 Figure 5 137 TRIP OUTPUT SCHEME LOGIC Sheet 1 of 2 ...

Page 398: ... 25 XVWRP 3ROH XUU 25 XVWRP XVWRP 2 23 5 1 6 23 1 32 Ů 25 75 3 287387 23 25 25 2II 6WDUW 7LPHU 3K Q 6 77 1 6 2II 25 2II 6WDUW 7LPHU U Q 2II 6WDUW 7LPHU U Q URP WULS RXWSXW ORJLF VKHHW 1 1 6WDUW 7LPHU 3K Q 7 0 5 1 2 23 5 1 75 3 3 705 1 7 75 3 5 705 1 7 2 23 5 1 WR SKDVH GLVWDQFH RQH ORJLF WR JURXQG GLVWDQFH RQH ORJLF 6 77 1 7ULS HOD RQ YROYLQJ DXOWV 6 77 1 7ULS HOD RQ YROYLQJ DXOWV 6 77 1 7ULS HOD ...

Page 399: ... parameter below the minimum voltage current setting The UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT AMP setting selects the minimum per unit voltage or current level required to allow the underfre quency element to operate This threshold is used to prevent an incorrect operation because there is no signal to measure This UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting is used to select the level at which the underfrequency element is to pi...

Page 400: ...ip The overfrequency element can be used to control the turbine frequency ramp down at a generating location This element can also be used for feeder reclosing as part of the after load shedding restoration The OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE setting selects the source for the signal to be measured The OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting selects the level at which the overfrequency element is to pickup Figure 5 140 OVERF...

Page 401: ...sequence voltage Overvoltage supervision should be used to pre vent operation under specific system conditions such as faults FREQ RATE 1 OC SUPV PICKUP This setting defines minimum current level required for operation of the element The supervising function responds to the positive sequence current Typical application includes load shedding Set the pickup threshold to zero if no overcurrent super...

Page 402: ...d but only if the frequency is already below certain level such as for load shedding this setting should be set to the required frequency level If the signal source assigned to the frequency rate of change element is only set to auxiliary VT then the minimum voltage supervision is 3 V Figure 5 141 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE SCHEME LOGIC NOTE V_1 PICKUP FREQ RATE 1 BLOCK Off RUN FREQ RATE 1 SOURCE Po...

Page 403: ...the frequency difference F This time can be calculated by EQ 5 33 where phase angle difference in degrees F frequency difference in Hz SYNCHROCHECK 1 SYNCHK1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE SYNCHK1 BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE SRC 1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE SRC 2 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DI...

Page 404: ...cts the combination of dead and live sources that will by pass synchronism check function and permit the breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages V1 or and V2 are below the maximum voltage threshold A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level Six options are available None Dead Source function is disabled LV1 and DV2 Live V1 and Dead V2 DV1 and LV2 Dead V1 an...

Page 405: ...le with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage ensure that only the auxiliary voltage is programmed in one of the sources to be used for synchrocheck Exception Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye connected auxil iary voltage 2 The relay measures frequency and Volts Hz from an input on a given source with priorities as established by the con figuration of...

Page 406: ...olt SETTINGS ΔF Maximum Max Freq Diff Freq Hysteresis SETTING ΔΦ Maximum Max Angle Diff SETTING ΔV Maximum Max Volt Diff AND OR XOR AND AND AND AND AND 827076AD CDR ACTUAL VALUES Synchrocheck 1 ΔV Synchrocheck 1 ΔΦ Synchrocheck 1 ΔF AND SETTINGS Enabled 1 Function Off 0 Block AND AND AND AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX FLEXLOGIC OPE...

Page 407: ... DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED This setting enables or disabled the digital element pickup LED When set to Disabled the operation of the pickup LED is blocked Figure 5 143 DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS Some versions of the digital input modules include an active voltage monitor circuit connected across form A contacts The voltage monitor circuit limits the trickle cur...

Page 408: ... operating current of the breaker trip coil If the circuit presents a high resis tance the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared In most breaker control circuits the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the breaker is open see diagram below To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation the trip circuit mo...

Page 409: ...r see figure below across the auxiliary contact in the trip circuit In this case it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position the BLOCK setting is selected to Off In this case the settings are as follows EnerVista UR Setup example shown Figure 5 145 TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2 The wiring connection for two examples above is applicable to both form A contacts with vol...

Page 410: ...al to EQL or less than LO the set value COUNTER 1 UP Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter If an enabled UP input is received when the accumulated value is at the limit of 2 147 483 647 counts the counter will rollover to 2 147 483 648 COUNTER 1 DOWN Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter If an enabled DOWN input is received when the accumulated value is at...

Page 411: ...and for capturing freezing the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation and resetting the count to 0 COUNTER 1 FREEZE COUNT Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing freezing the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation and continuing counting The present accumulated value and captured frozen value wi...

Page 412: ...ESSAGE BREAKER FLASHOVER 2 See page 5 277 MESSAGE BREAKER FLASHOVER 3 See page 5 277 MESSAGE BREAKER FLASHOVER 4 See page 5 277 MESSAGE BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 See page 5 281 MESSAGE BREAKER RESTRIKE 2 See page 5 281 MESSAGE CONTINUOUS MONITOR See page 5 283 MESSAGE CT FAILURE DETECTOR See page 5 285 MESSAGE VT FUSE FAILURE 1 See page 5 287 MESSAGE VT FUSE FAILURE 2 See page 5 287 MESSAGE VT FUSE FAILU...

Page 413: ... Fault duration is defined as a time between operation of the disturbance detector occurring before initiation of this feature and reset of an internal low set overcurrent function Cor rection is implemented to account for a non zero reset time of the overcurrent function Breaker arcing currents and fault duration values are available under the ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS MAINTENANCE BREAKER 1 4 menus B...

Page 414: ...ER 1 ARCING AMP BLOCK BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP INIT A BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP INIT B BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP INIT C BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP LIMIT CLEAR BREAKER 1 ARCING AMPS BKR 1 ARCING AMP FA BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FA BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FB BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FC BKR 1 OPERATING TIME BKR 1 ARCING AMP FB BKR 1 ARCING AMP FC BKR1 ARC OP BKR1 ARC DPO BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP SOURCE IA IB IC Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 ...

Page 415: ... None SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD A Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD B Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 STATUS CLSD C Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR V PKP 0 850 pu Range 0 000 to 1 500 pu in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP 1000 V Range 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1 MESSAGE BKR 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP 0 600 pu Range 0 00...

Page 416: ...itions prior to flashover detection are 1 52a status 0 2 VAg VBg or VCg is greater than the pickup setting 3 IA IB IC 0 no current flows through the breaker 4 VA is greater than pickup not applicable in this scheme The conditions at flashover detection are 1 52a status 0 2 IA IB or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker 3 VA is greater than pickup not applicable in this ...

Page 417: ...tatus of the breaker A separate FlexLogic operand can be selected to detect individual breaker pole status and pro vide flashover detection The recommended setting is 52a breaker contact or another operand defining the breaker poles open status BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP This setting specifies a pickup level for the phase voltages from both sides of the breaker If six VTs are available opening the breake...

Page 418: ... BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP B BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO C BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP C BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP C BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV A BRK 1 STATUS CLSD B BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV B BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV C BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 SRC BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC Enable 1 RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 6 SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 6 none VB Vb IB Block OFF 0 VA PKP FlexLogic operand O...

Page 419: ...IKE 1 OP operand is asserted for a short period of time The user can add coun ters and other logic to facilitate the decision making process as to the appropriate actions upon detecting a single restrike or a series of consecutive restrikes A restrike event FlexLogic operand is declared if all of the following hold The current is initially interrupted BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 FUNCTION...

Page 420: ... SOURCE This setting selects the source of the current for this element This source must have a valid CT bank assigned BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 PICKUP This setting specifies the pickup level of the overcurrent detector in per unit values of CT nominal current BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 RESET DELAY This setting specifies the reset delay for this element When set to 0 ms then FlexLogic operand will be picked up f...

Page 421: ...R V SUPV Off Range FlexLogic operand To supervise voltage logic use VT FUSE FAIL OP MESSAGE CONT MONITOR TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latched Disabled MESSAGE CONT MONITOR EVENTS Disabled Range Disabled Enabled RUN Current interruption detection logic 0 05 pu for cycle I t mag ARMED RESET SETTING Enabled BREAKER RESTRIKE 1 FUNCTION SETTING Off BKR RSTR 1 BLK AND SETTING IA BREAKER RESTRIKE 1...

Page 422: ...der these conditions This could occur when an element is incorrectly set so that it may misoperate under load The continuous monitor can detect this state and issue an alarm and or block the trip ping of the relay Figure 5 153 CONTINUOUS MONITOR SCHEME LOGIC SETTING CONT MONITOR FUNCTION Enabled 1 SETTING CONSTANT CONT MONITOR TIMER t pkp 1 sec t RST 0 CONT MONITOR I_SUPV Off 0 SETTING CONT MONITO...

Page 423: ...esenting operation of some remote current protection elements via communication chan nels can also be chosen CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 1 This setting selects the current source for input 1 The most critical protection element should also be assigned to the same source CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 1 PICKUP This setting selects the 3I_0 pickup value for input 1 the main supervised CT source CT FAIL 3I0 INPUT 2 This se...

Page 424: ...in 5 7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS 5 CT FAIL 3V0 INPUT PICKUP This setting specifies the pickup value for the 3V_0 source CT FAIL PICKUP DELAY This setting specifies the pickup delay of the CT failure element Figure 5 154 CT FAILURE DETECTOR SCHEME LOGIC ...

Page 425: ...cations of fuse failure could also be present when faults are present on the system so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure declarations during these events is pro vided Once the fuse failure condition is declared it will be sealed in until the cause that generated it disappears An additional condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circui...

Page 426: ...20 cycles SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TIMER OPEN POLE OP The OPEN POLE OP operand applies to the D60 L60 and L90 Neutral Wire Open Detect SETTING Enabled 1 SOURCE 1 3V_0 3rd Harmonic SETTING Run 3V_0 3rd Harm setting 3 HARM PKP AND SRC1 3V0 3nd Harmonic FLEX ANALOG AND 5 cycles 0 TIMER SRC1 VT NEU WIRE OPEN FLEXLOGIC OP...

Page 427: ...nce of the entire line If shunt reactors are applied this value should be a net capacitive reactance of the line and the reactors installed between the line breakers The value is entered in secondary ohms This setting is relevant if open pole condition at the remote end of the line is to be sensed and utilized by the relay The OPEN POLE LINE XC0 setting specifies zero sequence reactance of the ent...

Page 428: ...pole is declared only after the breaker opens and current disappears If the fault evolves into a multi phase fault before the circuit breaker pole opens for the first fault the phase selector will change the fault type from a single line to ground fault to a multi phase fault thereby initiating a three pole trip The OPEN POLE DETECTION setting selects the signals used to detect an open pole condit...

Page 429: ... 5 5 ƹ 6 5 5 6 ƹ 5 5 6 ƹ 25 25 2 23 5 1 6 5 5 226 5 5 26 5 5 23 1 32 25 25 25 2 23 5 1 6 5 5 ƹ 6 5 5 6 ƹ 5 5 6 ƹ 25 25 2 23 5 1 6 5 5 226 5 5 23 1 32 6 77 1 2SHQ 3ROH 5HP XUUHQW 3NS 581 UHPRWH 3LFNXS UHPRWH 3LFNXS UHPRWH 3LFNXS 7 0 56 F FOHV F FOHV F FOHV F FOHV F FOHV F FOHV 1 1 25 25 25 5 2 23 5 1 6 23 1 32 5 0 23 Ů 23 1 32 5 0 23 Ů 23 1 32 5 0 23 Ů 3 6 3 6 3 6 6 77 1 DQG 9 DQG DX DQG 9 RQO 2SHQ...

Page 430: ...0 0 to 100 0 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I1 MIN 0 10 pu Range 0 05 to 1 00 pu in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I1 MAX 1 50 pu Range 0 05 to 5 00 pu in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 PKP DELAY 20 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE BROKEN CONDCT 1 BLK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE BROKEN CONDUCT 1 TARGET Self reset Range Self reset Latch...

Page 431: ...imum positive sequence current supervision level Ensure this setting is programmed to a sufficient level to prevent I_2 I_1 from erratic pickup due to a low I_1 signal However this setting should not be set too high since the broken conductor condition cannot be detected under light load conditions when I_1 is less than the value specified by this setting BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 I1 MAX This setting spe...

Page 432: ...ection trip time constant I measured overload RMS current Ip measured load RMS current before overload occurs k IEC 255 8 k factor applied to IB defining maximum permissible current above nominal current IB protected element base nominal current THERMAL PROTECTION 1 THERMAL PROTECTION 1 FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE THERMAL PROTECTION 1 SOURCE SRC1 Range SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3 SRC 4 ...

Page 433: ...ime setting Figure 5 159 IEC 255 8 SAMPLE OPERATE AND RESET CURVES The thermal overload protection element estimates accumulated thermal energy E using the following equations calculated each power cycle When current is greater than the pickup level In k IB element starts increasing the thermal energy EQ 5 37 When current is less than the dropout level In 0 97 k IB the element starts decreasing th...

Page 434: ... All calculations are performed per phase If the accumulated energy reaches value 1 in any phase the thermal overload protection element operates and only resets when energy is less than 0 05 in all three phases The logic for the thermal overload protection element is shown below Figure 5 160 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION SCHEME LOGIC Table 5 29 TYPICAL TIME CONSTANTS PROTECTED EQUIPMENT TIME CONSTA...

Page 435: ...UTT SCHEME See page 5 297 MESSAGE PUTT SCHEME See page 5 302 MESSAGE POTT SCHEME See page 5 302 MESSAGE POTT1 SCHEME See page 5 306 MESSAGE HYBRID POTT SCHEME See page 5 308 MESSAGE BLOCKING SCHEME See page 5 312 MESSAGE DCUB SCHEME See page 5 316 DUTT SCHEME DUTT SCHEME FUNCTION Disabled Range Disabled Enabled MESSAGE DUTT SCHEME BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE DUTT SEAL IN DELAY 0 010 ...

Page 436: ...his setting allows the user to assign any FlexLogic operand to block the scheme Contact inputs from a pilot cut out switch are typically used for this purpose DUTT SEAL IN DELAY The output FlexLogic operand DUTT OP is produced according to the DUTT scheme logic A seal in time delay is applied to this operand for coping with noisy communication channels such as a power line carrier The DUTT SEAL IN...

Page 437: ... inputs Figure 5 161 DUTT SCHEME LOGIC SETTING SETTINGS SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND DUTT SCHEME FUNCTION DUTT NO OF COMM BITS DUTT NO OF COMM BITS DUTT NO OF COMM BITS Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 PH DIST Z1 PKP DUTT RX1 DUTT RX2 DUTT RX3 DUTT RX4 DUTT TX1 DUTT TRIP A DUTT TRIP B DUTT TRIP C DUTT TRIP 3P DUTT TX2 DUTT TX3 DUTT TX4 DUTT OP DUTT SEA...

Page 438: ...ser to assign any FlexLogic operand to block the scheme Contact inputs from a pilot cut out switch are typically used for this purpose PUTT RX PICKUP DELAY This setting enables the relay to cope with spurious receive signals This delay should be set longer than the longest spurious TX signal that can be received simultaneously with the zone 1 pickup The selected delay will increase the response ti...

Page 439: ... the resulting signals should be configured as the PUTT RX inputs Figure 5 162 PUTT SCHEME LOGIC SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUTT RX1 PUTT RX2 PUTT RX3 PUTT RX4 PUTT NO OF COMM BITS Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 PH DIST Z2 PKP PH DIST Z1 PKP PUTT OP PUTT SEAL IN DELAY PUTT RX PICKUP DELAY SETTING PUTT SCHEME BLOCK OFF 0 837013AE CDR GND DIST Z2 PKP ...

Page 440: ...om MESSAGE POTT ECHO COND Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE POTT RX PICKUP DELAY 0 000 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY 0 020 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY 0 090 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO DURATION 0 100 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO LOCKOUT 0 250 s R...

Page 441: ...al that can be received simultaneously with the Zone 2 pickup The selected delay will increase the response time of the scheme TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the POTT scheme for coping with the exposure of a ground directional overcurrent function if used to current reversal condi tions The transient blocking mechanism applies to the ground...

Page 442: ...ing forward looking protec tion element used as GND DIR O C FWD Even though any FlexLogic operand could be used as GND DIR O C FWD allow ing the user to combine responses of various protection elements or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic equations this extra signal is primarily meant to be the output operand from either the negative sequence directional overcurrent or neutral directiona...

Page 443: ...HO DURATION TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY POTT SEAL IN DELAY AND OR AND OR AND AND AND AND AND OR 0 tRST 0 tRST tPKP tPKP tPKP 0 ECHO LOCKOUT Echo duration and lockout logic SETTINGS POTT RX1 POTT RX2 POTT RX3 POTT RX4 POTT NO OF COMM BITS Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 OR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS POTT NO OF COMM BITS POTT TX1 POTT TX2 POTT TX3 POTT TX4 ECHO TABLE TRANSMIT TABLE Phase Selector RX RX RUN RUN FLEXLOGI...

Page 444: ...ESSAGE ECHO DURATION 0 100 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO LOCKOUT 0 250 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE LINE END OPEN PICKUP DELAY 0 050 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE POTT1 SEAL IN DELAY 0 010 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE DIR FWD1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE DIR FWD2 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSA...

Page 445: ...her the Negative Sequence Directional IOC or Neutral Directional IOC Both of these ele ments have separate forward FWD and reverse REV output operands The forward indication is used NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD or NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD Figure 5 164 POTT1 GROUND SCHEME LOGIC SETTING SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETTING SETTING POTT1 SCHEME FUNCTION Enabled Custom DIR FWD1 LINE PICKUP LEO PKP Of...

Page 446: ...AGE TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY 0 020 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY 0 090 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO DURATION 0 100 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO LOCKOUT 0 250 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE HYB POTT SEAL IN DELAY 0 010 s Range 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE GND DIR...

Page 447: ...user application When used in conjunction with the trip output element the scheme is pre configured to initiate trip breaker fail and single pole autoreclose actions HYB POTT BLOCK This setting allows the user to assign any FlexLogic operand to block the scheme Contact inputs from a pilot cut out switch are typically used for this purpose HYB POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO If set to Enabled the scheme sends...

Page 448: ...rotection element used as GND DIR O C FWD Even though any FlexLogic operand could be used as GND DIR O C FWD enabling the user to combine responses of var ious protection elements or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic equations this extra signal is primarily meant to be the output operand from either the negative sequence directional or neutral directional overcurrent elements Both these ...

Page 449: ...DIST Z2 PKP PH DIST Z4 PKP PH DIST Z1 PKP LINE PICKUP LEO PKP OPEN POLE OP LINE PICKUP UV PKP HYB POTT OP Off 0 Off GND DIR O C FWD HYB POTT WEAK INFEED HYB POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO HYB POTT W I COND GND DIR O C REV HYB POTT RX1 HYB POTT RX2 HYB POTT RX3 HYB POTT RX4 HYB POTT NO OF COMM BITS HYB POTT ECHO COND GND DIST Z2 PKP GND DIST Z4 PKP GND DIST Z1 PKP OR OR OR OR OR OR AND AND AND AND AND Enable...

Page 450: ... and set per rules of distance relaying If used by this scheme the selected ground directional overcurrent functions must be enabled config ured and programmed accordingly In single pole tripping applications the scheme uses local fault type identification provided by the phase selector together with information received from the remote terminal BLOCKING SCHEME BLOCKING SCHEME FUNCTION Disabled Ra...

Page 451: ...ke into account the pickup time of the reverse looking elements of the scheme The delay defined by this setting should not be too short in order to avoid locking up a spurious reverse fault indication that can occur during internal fault conditions TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the blocking scheme for coping with the exposure of the overrea...

Page 452: ...ommunications channel avail able for the scheme With only one bit available the scheme sends the blocking signal by asserting the DIR BLOCK TX INIT FlexLogic operand This operand should be used to start the channel set the blocking signal On internal faults the scheme removes the blocking signal by asserting the DIR BLOCK TX1 FlexLogic operand For tripping the scheme responds to lack of the blocki...

Page 453: ...BLOCKING SCHEME RX3 BLOCKING SCHEME RX4 BLOCK SCHEME NO OF COMM BITS GND DIR O C REV 837016AG CDR GND DIST Z2 PKP GND DIST Z4 PKP GND DIST Z1 PKP OR OR OR OR OR AND AND AND tPKP tPKP 0 0 tRST tRST Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 Off 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BLOCK SCHEME NO OF COMM BITS DIR BLOCK TX1 STOP DIR BLOCK TX2 STOP DIR BLOCK TX3 STOP DIR BLOCK TX4 STOP TRANSMIT TABLE RX RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BL...

Page 454: ...0 s Range 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO DURATION 0 100 s Range 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE ECHO LOCKOUT 0 250 s Range 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE LINE END OPEN PICKUP DELAY 0 050 s Range 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE DCUB LOG PICKUP DELAY 0 008 s Range 0 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 MESSAGE GUARD HEALTHY RESET DELAY 0 150 s Range 0 to 65 535 s in s...

Page 455: ...unications interfaces can be used for example digital communication channels utilizing the L90 teleprotection input outputs To make the scheme fully operational as a stand alone feature the scheme output operands must be configured to inter face with other relay functions output contacts in particular Typically the output operands should be programmed to initiate a trip breaker fail and autoreclos...

Page 456: ...rent reversal conditions The transient blocking logic applies to both operate trip and send transmit paths Identifying the fault as a reverse fault prevents the scheme from both operating and keying the channel If the reverse fault condition prevails for TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY value the blocking operation will be extended by the transient blocking timer for the TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY value This...

Page 457: ...cheme until the guard signal is restored and the GUARD HEALTHY RESET DELAY timer expires Typical values for this setting are from 160 to 180 ms for most cases a setting of about 150 ms may be used DCUB SEAL IN DELAY The output FlexLogic operand DCUB OP is produced according to the directional compari son unblocking scheme logic The DCUB SEAL IN DELAY defines a minimum guaranteed duration of the DC...

Page 458: ...IN DELAY 0 tRST FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DCUB NO OF COMM BITS RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DCUB TRIP A DCUB TRIP B DCUB TRIP C DCUB TRIP 3P Phase Selector RX TRANSMIT TABLE DCUB NO OF COMM BITS RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DCUB TX1 DCUB TX2 DCUB TX3 DCUB TX4 ECHO TABLE RUN DCUB OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR FORCE 3P TRIP OPEN POLE OP Phase Selector FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR FORCE 3P TRIP OPEN POLE OP Phase Selector RX Off 0...

Page 459: ...B Range Protection AND CB Protection Only MESSAGE AR BLOCK BKR1 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR CLOSE TIME BKR 1 0 10 s Range 0 00 to 655 35 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR BKR MAN CLOSE Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR BLK TIME UPON MAN CLS 10 00 s Range 0 00 to 655 35 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR 1P INIT Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR 3P INIT Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSA...

Page 460: ...teps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR RESET Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR RESET TIME 60 00 s Range 0 to 655 35 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR BKR CLOSED Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR BLOCK Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR PAUSE Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME 5 00 s Range 0 to 655 35 s in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE AR BLOCK BKR2 Off Range FlexLogic operand MESSAGE AR...

Page 461: ...third and fourth shots are always three pole and start the AR 3 P DEAD TIME 2 4 timers 2 1 Pole In this mode the autorecloser starts the AR 1 P DEAD TIME for the first shot if the fault is single phase If the fault is three phase or a three pole trip on the breaker occurred during the single pole initiation the scheme goes to lockout without reclosing If two or more shots are enabled the second th...

Page 462: ...de another phase during the single pole dead time of the auto recloser the scheme will force a 3 pole trip and reclose RECLOSING SCHEME OPERATION FOR ONE BREAKER Permanent Fault Consider Mode 1 which calls for 1 Pole or 3 Pole Time Delay 1 for the first reclosure and 3 Pole Time Delay 2 for the second reclosure and assume a permanent fault on the line Also assume the scheme is in the Reset state F...

Page 463: ...y an initiate signal the scheme moves into the reclose in progress state and starts the incomplete sequence timer The setting of this timer determines the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose shot If a close breaker 1 or 2 signal is not present before this time expires the scheme goes to Lockout There are four other conditions that can take the scheme to the Lockout state as shown be...

Page 464: ...tivated through the AR Mode Activation inputs explained as follows MODE 1 to MODE 4 ACTIVATION This setting selects an operand for activating the corresponding AR mode in run time Mode change via activation input takes place when only one of the four activation inputs is high and the AR RIP operand is low that is reclose is not in progress and also the mode to be activated is different from the ex...

Page 465: ...is setting represents the dead time following the third three pole trip AR 3 P DEAD TIME 4 This setting represents the dead time following the third three pole trip AR EXTEND DEAD T 1 This setting selects an operand that will adapt the duration of the dead time for the first shot to the possibility of non simultaneous tripping at the two line ends Typically this is the operand set when the communi...

Page 466: ...he reclosing cycle until successful the scheme will reset or unsuccessful the scheme will go to Lock out When set to Lockout the scheme will go to lockout without attempting to reclose breaker 2 AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 2 1 and Breaker 2 has failed to close When set to Continue the closing command will be transferred ...

Page 467: ... 3 OR AND AND OR SETTING Off 0 Bkr 3 Pole Open OR BKR 3 POLE OPEN from autoreclose logic sheet 3 AND OR SETTING Protection and CB AR Initiate Mode AND AND RESET from autoreclose logic sheet 2 CLOSE BKR1 OR BKR2 OR OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR SHOT COUNT 0 OR SETTING Off 0 Pause SHOT COUNT MAX from autoreclose logic sheet 2 SETTING Mode 2 1 Pole AR Mode Mode 3 3 Pole A Mode 4 3 Pole B OR FLEXLOGIC OPERA...

Page 468: ... because AR Mode equals to 1 2 3 and 4 respec tively so that it can be monitored and logged FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR RIP AND Off 0 Mode 1 Off 0 Mode 2 Off 0 Mode 3 Off 0 Mode 4 Only 1 out of 4 is high AR Mode Activation SETTING SETTING AR M0DE Mode 1 1 3 Pole Mode 2 1 Pole Mode 3 3 Pole A Mode 4 3 Pole B Mode to be activated a 1 4 Current AR Mode b 1 4 Switch to new mode Note only one mode can be acti...

Page 469: ...GE Multilin L90 Line Current Differential System 5 331 5 SETTINGS 5 7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 Figure 5 170 SINGLE POLE AUTORECLOSE LOGIC Sheet 2 of 3 ...

Page 470: ... BREAKER 2 ONE P OPEN BREAKER 2 CLOSED BREAKER 1 MNL CLS BREAKER 1 OOS BREAKER 2 OOS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 2 MNL CLS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR OR BKR MANUAL CLOSE To sheet 1 BKR CLOSED To sheet 1 and 2 BKR 3 POLE OPEN To sheet 1 B...

Page 471: ... ND T PROT T TRIP BKR T PROT RESET T R I P AR RIP AR 1 P RIP AR FORCE 3P TRIP CLOSE AR CLOSE BKR1 T CLOSE BKR1 T TRIP BKR T PROT RESET 3 P 2 DEAD TIME TRANSFER TIME T CLOSE BKR2 842703A4 CDR T PROT T CLOSE BKR1 RESET TIME AR RESET TIME AR SHOT COUNT 0 BREAKER 1 CLOSED AR 3P INIT AR 3P 2 RIP BREAKER 2 CLOSED AR CLOSE BKR2 AR TRANSFER TIME AR INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME 1 P DEAD TIME 1 25 cycle ...

Page 472: ... user settable debounce time in order for the L90 to validate the new contact state In the figure below the debounce time is set at 2 5 ms thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state mark no 1 in the diagram Once validated de bounced the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that...

Page 473: ...o filter the LOW HIGH marks no 1 2 3 and 4 in the figure below and HIGH LOW marks no 5 6 7 and 8 below transitions Figure 5 173 INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each group The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect...

Page 474: ...tput operand will be set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return to off If set to Latched the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received input The self reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally ...

Page 475: ...vent damage to the less robust initiating contact This can be done by monitoring an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped but this scheme is subject to incorrect oper ation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change of state and interruption of current in the trip circuit The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is p...

Page 476: ...g specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs that is when both the OPERATE and RESET signals are applied With both control inputs applied simultaneously the contact will close if set to Operate dominant and will open if set to Reset dominant Application Example 1 A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user programmable pushbuttons buttons number 1 and 2 The...

Page 477: ...erVista UR Setup example shown Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS OUTPUTS CONTACT OUT PUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu assuming an H4L module OUTPUT H1a OPERATE VO1 OUTPUT H1a RESET VO2 5 8 4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS PATH SETTINGS INPUTS OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 96 There are 96 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic If not assigned th...

Page 478: ...nds a hold time which is set greater than four times the programmed default time required by the receiving device Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require as recognized by the identification of the originating device carried in the message Messages received from remote devices include the mes sage time allowed to live The receiving relay sets...

Page 479: ...ved data The remote input data item mapping takes care of the mapping of the inputs to remote input FlexLogic oper ands However GGIO3 data can be read by IEC 61850 clients 5 8 6 REMOTE INPUTS PATH SETTINGS INPUTS OUTPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1 32 Remote Inputs that create FlexLogic operands at the receiving relay are extracted from GSSE GOOSE messages originat ing in remote devices Each remo...

Page 480: ...TE DPS INPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUT 1 5 Remote double point status inputs are extracted from GOOSE messages originating in the remote device Each remote double point status input must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local use This functionality is accomplished with the five remote double point status input settings REM DPS IN 1 ID This s...

Page 481: ...am the remote relay connected to channels 1 and 2 of the local relay by assigning the desired FlexLogic operand to be sent via the selected communications channel This relay allows the user to create distributed protection and control schemes via dedicated communications channels Some examples are directional comparison pilot schemes and transfer tripping It should be noted that failures of commun...

Page 482: ...hrough 1 8 and eight direct outputs that are conveyed on communications channel 2 numbered 2 1 through 2 8 Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand The setting above is used to select the operand which represents a specific function as selected by the user to be transmitted Direct outputs 2 1 to 2 8 are only functional on three termina...

Page 483: ...LOGIC OPERAND DIRECT I P 1 1 same for 1 2 1 8 L90 1 87L is Enabled L90 communication channel SETTING DIRECT INPUT 1 1 DEFAULT same for 1 2 1 8 On Off ACTUAL VALUES CHANNEL 1 STATUS Fail OK OR SETTING DIRECT OUTPUT 1 1 same for 1 2 1 8 Off Flexlogic Operand FLEXLOGIC OPERAND DIRECT I P 1 1 same for 1 2 1 8 L90 2 SETTING DIRECT INPUT 1 1 DEFAULT same for 1 2 1 8 On Off Fail OK OR ACTUAL VALUES CHANN...

Page 484: ... available for each GOOSE analog input ANALOG 1 DEFAULT This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE analog input when the sending device is offline and the ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to Default Value This setting is stored as an IEEE 754 IEC 60559 floating point number Because of the large range of this setting not all possible values can be stored Some values may be rounded to the closest pos...

Page 485: ...lues Table 5 32 GOOSE ANALOG INPUT BASE UNITS ELEMENT BASE UNITS 87L SIGNALS Local IA Mag IB and IC Diff Curr IA Mag IB and IC Terminal 1 IA Mag IB and IC Terminal 2 IA Mag IB and IC IBASE maximum primary RMS value of the IN and IN inputs CT primary for source currents and 87L source primary current for line differential currents 87L SIGNALS Op Square Curr IA IB and IC Rest Square Curr IA IB and I...

Page 486: ...s are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5F transducer module installed in slot H The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled If Disabled no actual values are created for the chan nel An alphanumeric ID is assigned to each channel this ID will be included in the channel actual value along with t...

Page 487: ... are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled If Disabled there will not be an actual value created for the channel An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel this ID will be included in the chann...

Page 488: ...8 50 122 119 39 157 74 131 45 10 97 60 140 123 24 165 90 138 25 11 35 70 158 127 07 174 25 145 20 11 74 80 176 130 89 182 84 152 37 12 12 90 194 134 70 191 64 159 70 12 51 100 212 138 50 200 64 167 20 12 90 110 230 142 29 209 85 174 87 13 28 120 248 146 06 219 29 182 75 13 67 130 266 149 82 228 96 190 80 14 06 140 284 153 58 238 85 199 04 14 44 150 302 157 32 248 95 207 45 14 83 160 320 161 04 259...

Page 489: ... menu an exam ple for channel M5 is shown The relay checks the driving signal x in equations below for the minimum and maximum limits and subsequently re scales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE The follow ing equation is applied EQ 5 39 where x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting Imin and Imax are defined by the RA...

Page 490: ... system measured via UR series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the dcmA H1 output of the range of 1 to 1 mA The following settings are applied on the relay CT ratio 1200 5 VT secondary 115 VT connection is delta and VT ratio 120 The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal power factor is 0 90 The power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20 ove...

Page 491: ... are EQ 5 48 The base unit for voltage refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details is EQ 5 49 The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored in pu are EQ 5 50 The following settings should be entered DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE SRC 2 V_1 mag DCMA OUTPUT H3 RANGE 0 to 1 mA DCMA OUTPUT H3 MIN VAL 0 404 pu DCMA OUTPUT H3 MAX VAL 0 635 pu The limit settings differ from t...

Page 492: ...ions based inputs and outputs remain fully operational in test mode If a control action is programmed using direct inputs and outputs or remote inputs and outputs then the test procedure must take this into account When in Forcible mode the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting dictates further response of the L90 to testing conditions To force contact inputs and outputs through relay ...

Page 493: ...the voltage across the input terminals The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs Once enabled the relay is placed into test mode allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs The Test Mode LED will be on indicating that the relay is in test mode The state of each contact input may be programmed as Dis abl...

Page 494: ... and 3 should open and digital input 4 should close Also contact output 1 should freeze contact output 2 should open contact output 3 should close and contact output 4 should remain fully operational The required settings are shown below To enable user programmable pushbutton 1 to initiate the test mode make the following changes in the SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE menu TEST MODE FUNCTION Enabled an...

Page 495: ...Range 1 2 PMU 1 TEST VALUES PMU 1 TEST FUNCTION Disabled Range Enabled Disabled MESSAGE PMU 1 VA TEST MAGNITUDE 500 00 kV Range 0 00 to 700 00 kV in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 VA TEST ANGLE 0 00 Range 180 00 to 180 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAGE PMU 1 VB TEST MAGNITUDE 500 00 kV Range 0 00 to 700 00 kV in steps of 0 01 MESSAGE PMU 1 VB TEST ANGLE 120 00 Range 180 00 to 180 00 in steps of 0 05 MESSAG...

Page 496: ... Implementation defines a test mode which sends a pre defined set of Synchrophasors out over the communication channel when the test mode function setting is enabled In test mode the following actions take place a The Data Invalid Test Mode bit bit 15 in the STAT word is set b The Sim bit in all output datasets is set MESSAGE PMU 1 IB TEST MAGNITUDE 1 000 kA Range 0 000 to 9 999 kA in steps of 0 0...

Page 497: ...TPUTS See page 6 5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS See page 6 6 AUTORECLOSE See page 6 6 REMOTE DEVICES STATUS See page 6 6 REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS See page 6 7 CHANNEL TESTS See page 6 7 DIGITAL COUNTERS See page 6 8 SELECTOR SWITCHES See page 6 8 FLEX STATES See page 6 9 ETHERNET See page 6 9 REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING See page 6 9 IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS See page 6 10 COMM STATUS REMAINING CONNECT See p...

Page 498: ...ee page 6 22 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS See page 6 22 WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 1 See page 6 23 WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT 2 See page 6 23 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT See page 6 23 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT CURRENTS See page 6 24 TRANSDUCER I O DCMA INPUTS See page 6 24 TRANSDUCER I O RTD INPUTS See page 6 24 ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS FAULT REPORTS See page 6 25 EVENT RECORDS See page 6 25 OSCILLOGRAPHY See page 6 ...

Page 499: ...GE Multilin L90 Line Current Differential System 6 3 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 1 OVERVIEW 6 ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION See page 6 28 FIRMWARE REVISIONS See page 6 28 ...

Page 500: ...icates the ID of the virtual input For example Virt Ip 1 refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual input 6 2 3 REMOTE INPUTS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE INPUTS The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been estab...

Page 501: ...hich case the value shown is the pro grammed default state defined in the SETTINGS INPUTS OUTPUTS DIRECT DIRECT INPUTS menu 6 2 6 CONTACT OUTPUTS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT OUTPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUT 1 STATUS Bad Range On Off Intermediate Bad MESSAGE REMOTE DPS INPUT 2 STATUS Bad Range On Off Intermediate Bad MESSAGE REMOTE DPS INPUT 5 STATUS Bad Range On Off Intermediate Ba...

Page 502: ... of the default name array index The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual output as calculated by the FlexLogic equation for that output 6 2 8 AUTORECLOSE PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS AUTORECLOSE The automatic reclosure shot count is shown here 6 2 9 REMOTE DEVICES a STATUS PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATUS The present state of the programmed remote device...

Page 503: ...description of each actual value is below REMOTE DEVICE 1 REMOTE DEVICE 1 StNum 0 MESSAGE REMOTE DEVICE 1 SqNum 0 CHANNEL TESTS CHANNEL 1 STATUS n a Range n a FAIL OK MESSAGE CHANNEL 1 LOST PACKETS 0 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 Reset count to 0 through the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu MESSAGE CHANNEL 1 LOCAL LOOPBCK STATUS n a Range n a FAIL OK MESSAGE CHANNEL 1 REMOTE LOOPBCK STATUS n a Range n...

Page 504: ...ALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION The current state of the communications channel identification check and hence validity is displayed here If a remote relay ID number does not match the programmed number at the local relay the FAIL value is displayed The n a value appears if the local relay ID is set to a default value of 0 or if the 87L element is disabled Refer to SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP L90 POWER...

Page 505: ...Port 1 PTP Clock Port 2 PTP Clock Port 3 PTP Clock IRIG B SNTP and None FLEX STATES PARAM 1 Off Off Range Off On MESSAGE PARAM 2 Off Off Range Off On MESSAGE PARAM 256 Off Off Range Off On ETHERNET ETHERNET PRI LINK STATUS Fail Range Fail OK MESSAGE ETHERNET SEC LINK STATUS Fail Range Fail OK MESSAGE ETHERNET TRD LINK STATUS Fail Range Fail OK REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING RTC Sync Source None Ran...

Page 506: ...PDELAY if the port is synchronized but the peer delay mechanism is non operational and SYNCHRONIZED if synchronized PTP IRIG B DELTA is the time difference measured in nanoseconds between the fractional seconds portion of the time being received via PTP and that being received via IRIG B A positive value indicates that PTP time is fast compared to IRIG B time 6 2 16 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS PATH A...

Page 507: ...col PRP defines a redundancy protocol for high availability in substation automation net works PATH ACTUAL VALUES STATUS PRP TOTAL RECEIVED PORT A is a counter for total messages received either from DANPs or from SANs on Port A TOTAL RECEIVED PORT B is a counter for total messages received either from DANPs or from SANs on Port B TOTAL ERRORS is a counter for total messages received with an error...

Page 508: ...sitive PF Lag Current Voltage WATTS Positive VARS Negative PF Lead Current Voltage WATTS Negative VARS Negative PF Lag Current Voltage WATTS Negative VARS Positive PF Lead Current Generator Generator Inductive Inductive Resistive Resistive Generator Generator UR RELAY UR RELAY UR RELAY UR RELAY G G M M G G VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 1 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 2 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 3 VCG IC VAG IA VBG IB 4 ...

Page 509: ... not measurable the phase angles are not referenced The phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction and are presented as negative in the lagging direction to more closely align with power system metering conventions This is illustrated below Figure 6 2 UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION c UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS The UR series of relays calculate vol...

Page 510: ...lustrated in the following figure Figure 6 3 MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS ABC phase rotation ACB phase rotation Table 6 1 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE SYSTEM VOLTAGES SEC V VT CONN RELAY INPUTS SEC V SYMM COMP SEC V VAG VBG VCG VAB VBC VCA F5AC F6AC F7AC V0 V1 V2 13 9 0 76 2 125 79 7 250 84 9 313 138 3 97 85 4 241 WYE 13 9 0 76 2 125 79 7 250 19 5 192 56 5 7 23 3...

Page 511: ... 1 interface to a remote L90 at terminal 1 Terminal 2 refers to the communication channel 2 interface to a remote L90 at terminal 2 87L DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT LOCAL IA 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE LOCAL IB 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE LOCAL IC 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE TERMINAL 1 IA 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE TERMINAL 1 IB 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE TERMINAL 1 IC 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE TERMINAL 2 IA 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE TERMINAL 2 IB 0 000 ...

Page 512: ...RING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 See page 6 16 MESSAGE GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 See page 6 17 MESSAGE PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 See page 6 17 MESSAGE AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 See page 6 18 MESSAGE POWER SRC 1 See page 6 18 MESSAGE ENERGY SRC 1 See page 6 19 MESSAGE DEMAND SRC 1 See page 6 19 MESSAGE FREQUENCY SRC 1 See page 6 20 PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 ...

Page 513: ... source see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES d PHASE VOLTAGE METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE VOLTAGE MESSAGE SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 POS SEQ I1 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2 0 000 A 0 0 GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Ig 0 000 A MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Ig 0 000 A 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Igd 0 000 A 0 0 PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Vag 0 00 V MES...

Page 514: ...e SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES f POWER METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 POWER MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vca 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 POS SEQ V1 0 000 V 0 0 MESSAGE SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2 0 000 V 0 0 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 SRC 1 RMS Vx 0 00 V MESSAGE SRC 1 PHASOR Vx 0 000 V 0 0 POWER SRC 1 SRC 1 REAL POWER 3 0 000 W MESSAGE SRC 1 REAL POWER a 0 ...

Page 515: ...TUP SIGNAL SOURCES Because energy values are accumulated these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to changing CT or VT characteristics h DEMAND METERING PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 DEMAND MESSAGE SRC 1 APPARENT PWR c 0 000 VA MESSAGE SRC 1 POWER FACTOR 3 1 000 MESSAGE SRC 1 POWER FACTOR a 1 000 MESSAGE SRC 1 POWER FACTOR b 1 000 MESSAGE SRC 1 POWER FACTOR c 1 0...

Page 516: ... 1 text will be replaced by whatever name was pro grammed by the user for the associated source see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES SOURCE FREQUENCY is measured via software implemented zero crossing detection of an AC signal The signal is either a Clarke transformation of three phase voltages or currents auxiliary voltage or ground current as per source configuration see the SYSTEM SETUP POW...

Page 517: ...Y The tracking frequency is displayed here The frequency is tracked based on configuration of the reference source The TRACKING FREQUENCY is based upon positive sequence current phasors from all line terminals and is synchronously adjusted at all terminals If currents are below 0 125 pu then the NOMINAL FREQUENCY is used 6 3 7 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING FREQUENCY RATE OF ...

Page 518: ...urrents and 87L source primary current for line differential currents 87L SIGNALS Op Square Curr IA IB and IC Rest Square Curr IA IB and IC BASE Squared CT secondary of the 87L source BREAKER ARCING AMPS Brk X Arc Amp A B and C BASE 2000 kA2 cycle dcmA BASE maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the IN and IN inputs FREQUENCY fBASE 1 Hz PHASE ANGLE BAS...

Page 519: ...TMETRIC GROUND FAULT 1 WATT GND FLT 1 0 000 W PMU 1 PMU 1 VA 0 0000 kV 0 00 Range Va or Vab per VT bank connection MESSAGE PMU 1 VB 0 0000 kV 0 00 Range Va or Vab per VT bank connection MESSAGE PMU 1 VC 0 0000 kV 0 00 Range Va or Vab per VT bank connection MESSAGE PMU 1 VX 0 0000 kV 0 00 MESSAGE PMU 1 V1 0 0000 kV 0 00 MESSAGE PMU 1 V2 0 0000 kV 0 00 MESSAGE PMU 1 V0 0 0000 kV 0 00 Range Substitut...

Page 520: ...enu 6 3 13 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I O DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT xx Actual values for each dcmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units PATH ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I O RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT xx Actual values for each RTD input chann...

Page 521: ...The event records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest If all 1024 event records have been filled the oldest record will be removed as a new record is added Each event record shows the event identifier sequence number cause and date time stamp associated with the event trigger Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR ...

Page 522: ...e log gets full at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time the most recent samples were taken It counts up at the defined sampling rate If the data logger channels are defined then both values are static Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing data logger records 6 4 5 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS PATH ACTUAL VALUES...

Page 523: ...G TIME is defined as the slowest operating time of breaker poles that were initiated to open PMU 1 RECORDING PMU 1 FORCE TRIGGER Yes Range No Yes MESSAGE PUM 1 AVAILABLE RECORDS 0 Range 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 MESSAGE PUM 1 SECONDS PER RECORD 0 0 Range 0 to 6553 5 in steps of 0 1 MESSAGE PUM 1 LAST CLEARED 2005 07 14 015 40 16 Range date and time in format shown BREAKER 1 BKR 1 ARCING AMP A 0 00 ...

Page 524: ... standard GE Multilin serial number format MESSAGE ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS 000000000000 Range standard Ethernet MAC address format MESSAGE MANUFACTURING DATE 0 Range YYYY MM DD HH MM SS MESSAGE PMU FEATURE ACTIVE No Range Yes No MESSAGE CT VT ADVANCED DIAG ACTIVE No Range Yes No MESSAGE OPERATING TIME 0 00 00 Range operating time in HH MM SS MESSAGE LAST SETTING CHANGE 1970 01 01 23 11 19 Range YYYY ...

Page 525: ...2 VIRTUAL INPUTS PATH COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS The states of up to 64 virtual inputs are changed here The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input The second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input This status will be a state off logic 0 or on logic 1 COMMANDS MESSAGE COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS MESSAGE COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS MESSAGE COMMANDS SET DATE A...

Page 526: ...omplete date as a minimum must be entered to allow execution of this command The new time if entered and date will take effect at the moment the ENTER key is clicked The timescale of the entered time should be local time including daylight time where and when applicable COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS CLEAR FAULT REPORTS No Range No Yes CLEAR EVENT RECORDS No Range No Yes CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY No Range No Ye...

Page 527: ...or themselves under certain circumstances For example it may be desirable to clear diagnostic information after replacement of hardware Once the diagnostic information is cleared all self checking variables are reset to their initial state and diagnostics will restart from scratch The REBOOT RELAY COMMAND reboots the relay so that changes to configuration settings can take effect In most cases if ...

Page 528: ...nction to PMUs instead of measuring the phasor from physical signals with respect to the externally pro vided time reference they produce the physical signals with respect to the externally provided time reference given the desired phasor values Therefore the GPS synchronized test sets cannot be automatically assumed more accurate then the PMUs under test This calls for a method to verify both the...

Page 529: ...surements at the same time When frozen the measurements could be collected using EnerVista UR Setup or a protocol client 7 1 7 SECURITY iPATH COMMANDS SECURITY With the CyberSentry option this setting is available to enable or disable the following commands Administrator Logoff Selecting Yes allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an administrator session Engineer Logoff Selecting Yes allows th...

Page 530: ...ttings have not been programmed 7 2 3 RELAY SELF TESTS a DESCRIPTION The relay performs a number of self test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity The two types of self tests major and minor are listed in the tables below When either type of self test error occurs the Trouble LED Indicator will turn on and a target message displayed All errors record an event in the event recorder Latched ...

Page 531: ...90 How often the test is performed On power up Afterwards the backplane is checked for missing cards every five sec onds What to do Check all modules against the order code ensure they are inserted properly and cycle control power If the problem persists contact the factory Latched target message No Description of problem A FlexLogic equation is incorrect How often the test is performed The test i...

Page 532: ...d items An IEC61850 client will also show which nodes are available for the L90 Latched target message Yes Description of problem The battery is not functioning How often the test is performed The battery is monitored every five seconds The error message displays after 60 sec onds if the problem persists What to do Return the power supply module to GE Digital Energy for battery replacement To inst...

Page 533: ...ble clock is functioning If strict PP is enabled that entire network is PP compliant The network is delivering PTP messages to the relay Latched target message No Description of problem An Ethernet connection has failed How often the test is performed Monitored every five seconds What to do Check Ethernet connections Port 1 is the primary port and port 2 is the secondary port Latched target messag...

Page 534: ...est is performed when a device programmed to receive GOOSE messages stops receiving This can be from 1 to 60 seconds depending on GOOSE packets What to do Check GOOSE setup Latched target message Yes Description of problem The ambient temperature is greater than the maximum operating temperature 80 C How often the test is performed Every hour What to do Remove the L90 from service and install in a...

Page 535: ...target is activated HARDFIBER SELF TEST ERROR MESSAGES In addition to those provided by the standard UR series devices the UR devices implement HardFiber self tests These are listed below Any abnormal diagnostic condition indicated by the LEDs or the critical failure relay also results in a self test message so troubleshooting is described here For other relays such at the B95Plus see that product...

Page 536: ... single origin Process Bus Trouble Minor Self Test Description Communications problems with one or more Bricks The text of the message identifies the affected field units This self test is initiated by low received signal levels at either the Brick or Process Card end and by the sustained failure to receive poll responses from the proper Brick Severity This self test error does not directly inhibi...

Page 537: ...by default This allows access to the device immediately after installation When security is disabled all users are granted administrator access To enable the security system and require password use 1 Select the Security User Management menu item to open the user management window 2 Check the Enable Security box in the lower left corner to enable the security management system Security is now enab...

Page 538: ...TION Delete Entry Deletes the user account when exiting the user management window Actual Values Allows the user to read actual values Settings Allows the user to read setting values Commands Allows the user to execute commands Event Recorder Allows the user to use the digital fault recorder FlexLogic Allows the user to read FlexLogic values Update Info Allows the user to write to any function to ...

Page 539: ... 2 ACCESS RIGHTS SUMMARY FIELD DESCRIPTION Delete Entry Deletes the user account when exiting the user management window Actual Values Allows the user to read actual values Settings Allows the user to read setting values Commands Allows the user to execute commands Event Recorder Allows the user to use the digital fault recorder FlexLogic Allows the user to read FlexLogic values Update Info Allows...

Page 540: ...by separate roles as shown in the following figure so that access of UR devices by multiple per sonnel within a substation is allowed Permission for each role are outlined in the table later in this section Figure 8 1 CYBERSENTRY USER ROLES There are two types of authentication supported by CyberSentry that can be used to access the UR device Device Authentication local UR device authenticates Ser...

Page 541: ...ifferential System 8 5 8 SECURITY 8 2 CYBERSENTRY 8 8 2 2 SECURITY MENU a CYBERSENTRY SECURITY SETTINGS CyberSentry security settings are configured under Device Settings Product Setup Security Figure 8 2 CYBERSENTRY SECURITY PANEL ...

Page 542: ...1812 Administrator Primary Accounting Port RADIUS accounting port 1 65535 1813 Administrator Vendor ID An identifier that specifies RADIUS vendor specific attributes used with the protocol Value that represents General Electric Administrator RADIUS Authentication Shared Secret Shared secret used in authentication It displays as asterisks This setting must meet the CyberSentry password requirements...

Page 543: ...isabled To re enable device authentication the Supervisor unlocks the device for setting changes and then the Administrator can re enable device authentication Disabled Enabled Enabled Administrator Firmware Locked Indicates if the device receives firmware upgrades If Yes and the firmware upgrade attempt is made the device denies the upgrade and displays an error message that the lock is set On ea...

Page 544: ...empt is made the device alarm activates If No the device alarm does not activate On each firmware upgrade this setting goes back to the default No Yes Yes Administrator Settings lock A Boolean value indicating if the device can accept any settings changes If Yes and a settings change attempt is made the device alarm activates If No the device alarm does not activate No Yes Yes Supervisor Administr...

Page 545: ...etting RW RW R R R Direct Inputs RW RW R R R Direct Outputs RW RW R R R Teleprotection RW RW R R R Direct Analogs RW RW R R R Direct Integers RW RW R R R IEC61850 GOOSE Analogs RW RW R R R IEC61850 GOOSE Integers RW RW R R R Transducer I O RW RW R R R Testing RW RW R R R Front Panel Labels Designer NA NA NA NA NA Protection Summary NA NA NA NA NA Commands RW RW RW R R Virtual Inputs RW RW RW R R C...

Page 546: ...unts possible on the UR if the user ID credential does not match one of the five local accounts the UR automatically forwards the request to a RADIUS server when one is provided If a RADIUS server is provided but is unreachable over the network server authentication requests are denied In this situ ation use local UR accounts to gain access to the UR system See the specific RADIUS server instructi...

Page 547: ...een situations that are declared to be a fault and those that are not The L90 uses an innovative adaptive decision process based on an on line computation of the sources of measurement error In this adaptive approach the restraint region is an ellipse with variable major axis minor axis and orientation Parameters of the ellipse vary with time to make best use of the accuracy of current measurement...

Page 548: ...ay thanks to the high sampling rate used by the relay The output of the MIMIC calculation is the input for the phaselet computation The MIMIC computation is applied to the data samples for each phase at each terminal The equation shown is for one phase at one terminal 9 1 4 PHASELET COMPUTATION Phaselets are partial sums in the computation for fitting a sine function to measured samples Each slave...

Page 549: ...e terms traditional and adaptive Each relay calculates local portion of the traditional and restraint current to be used locally and sent to remote peers for use with differential calculations If more than one CT are connected to the relay breaker and the half applications then a maximum of all up to 4 currents is cho sen to be processed for traditional restraint The current chosen is expressed as...

Page 550: ... of the error in the measurements 9 1 7 GROUND DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT The line ground differential function allows sensitive ground protection for single line to ground faults allowing the phase differential element to be set higher above load to provide protection for multi phase faults The L90 ground differential function calculates ground differential current from all terminal phase currents The ...

Page 551: ...ent errors we mean that when currents change at the same time the effect is seen at different times at different measure ment points For best results samples should be taken simultaneously at all terminals In the case of peer to peer architecture synchronization is accomplished by synchronizing the clocks to each other rather than to a master clock Each relay compares the phase of its clock to the...

Page 552: ...ent phasors To improve sensitivity the clocks are controlling current sampling are closely synchronized via the ping pong algorithm How ever this algorithm assumes the communication channel delay is identical in each direction If the delays are not the same the error between current phasors is equal to half of the transmit receive time difference If the error is high enough the relay perceives the...

Page 553: ...se a phasor notation EQ 9 21 Each terminal computes positive sequence current EQ 9 22 Each relay computes a quantity derived from the positive sequence current that is indicative of the amount of rotation from one cycle to the next by computing the product of the positive sequence current times the complex conjugate of the posi tive sequence current from the previous cycle EQ 9 23 The angle of the...

Page 554: ...nt out each cycle in a single message The transmit and receive time stamps are based on the first message in the sequence One of the strengths of this approach is that it is not necessary to explicitly identify or match time stamp messages Usually two of the time stamps in an outgoing message are simply taken from the last incoming message The third time stamp is the transmittal time However there...

Page 555: ...as in the time stamp is acceptable provided it is the same for all terminals Figure 9 2 ROUND TRIP DELAY AND CLOCK OFFSET COMPUTATION FROM TIME STAMPS 831729A2 CDR Relay 1 Send T2i 3 Clocks mismatch Send T1i 2 Send T2i 2 Send T1i 1 Send T2i 1 Store T2i 2 Store T1i 2 Capture T2 T1 i 1 i T1i Capture T1 T2 i 1 i T2i Slow down Speed up Send T1i 3 Store T1i 3 Store T2i 3 Capture T1i 2 T1i 2 8 3 ms 8 3 ...

Page 556: ...hase information the appropriate filter for frequency deviation is an integrator which is combined with the integrator of the PI filter for the phase It is very important to combine these two integrators into a single function because it can be shown if two separate integra tors are used they can drift in opposite directions into saturation because the loop would only drive their sum to zero In no...

Page 557: ...tarts its clock at the nominal power system frequency Phaselet information is computed and transmitted Outgoing messages over a given channel are treated in the same way as during the channel recovery process The special start up message is sent each time containing only a single time step value When incoming messages begin arriving over a channel that channel is placed in service and the loop fil...

Page 558: ... for noise harmonics transients and current transformer saturation is computed as follows First the sum of the squares of the errors in the data samples is computed from the sum of squares information for the present phaselet EQ 9 28 Then fundamental magnitude is computed as follows for the same phaselet EQ 9 29 Finally the local adaptive restraint term is computed as follows for each local curren...

Page 559: ...onnected to the relay breaker and the half applications the CT saturation mechanism is executed between the maximum local current against the sum of all others then between the maximum local and remote currents to select the secure multiplier MULT A Maximum of two local and remote is selected and then applied to adaptive restraint Figure 9 4 CT SATURATION ADAPTIVE RESTRAINT MULTIPLIER 9 1 18 CHARG...

Page 560: ...t required by the line This reduces the amount of charging current flowing into the line In this application the setting for the line capacitance should be the residual capacitance remaining after subtracting the shunt inductive reactance from the total capacitive reactance at the power system frequency 9 1 19 DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENT CHARACTERISTICS The differential element is completely dependent on...

Page 561: ...uspended that is the 87L function will not be per formed at these relays but they can still trip via DTT from the master relay until the channel is restored If the esti mated error is within margin upon channel restoration and after two to three power cycles of valid PFLL calculations the PFLL will be declared as OK and the configuration will revert back to master master 2 If 2 channels fail PFLL ...

Page 562: ...s are essentially in phase real represents external fault when currents are 180 apart 2 The magnitude of remote current 3 The magnitude of the local current 4 Dynamically estimated errors in calculations 5 Settings The following figure also shows the relay s capability to handle week infeed conditions by increasing the restraint ellipse when the remote current is relatively small 1 5 pu Therefore ...

Page 563: ...c I I o 2 For rem 3 pu and angle 0 360 with respect to loc I I o OPERATE Iloc Irem 3 I I loc rem 180 150 120 90 60 30 30 60 90 120 150 180 1 2 3 4 0 I I loc rem RESTRAINT RESTRAINT 1 2 Boundary point angle between loc and rem about 130 I I o Trip point angle between loc and rem 0 I I o Boundary point angle between loc and rem about 140 I I o OPERATE 1 2 I I loc rem Imaginary 2 2 3 1 2 3 4 I I loc ...

Page 564: ...t as follows EQ 9 35 where 0 assuming a pure sine wave 9 2 3 TRIP DECISION TEST The trip condition is shown below EQ 9 36 The use of the CURRENT DIFF PICKUP CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1 CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 2 and CURRENT DIFF BREAK PT settings are discussed in the Current differential section of chapter 5 The following figure shows how the L90 settings affect the restraint characteristics The local ...

Page 565: ...ORY OF OPERATION 9 2 OPERATING CONDITION CHARACTERISTICS 9 Figure 9 8 SETTINGS IMPACT ON RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC 831725A1 CDR 0 4 8 12 Irem pu OPERATE RESTRAINT BP 8 P 2 S1 30 S2 50 BP 4 P 1 S1 30 S2 50 BP 4 P 1 S1 20 S2 40 OPERATE Iloc pu 16 20 0 4 8 10 16 20 ...

Page 566: ...ion after the memory expires Con sequently zone 1 is recommended as an underreaching element and zones 2 through 5 are recommended as overreach ing elements and for time delayed tripping The relay uses offset ground directional overcurrent functions as an optional supplement of the ground distance protection for pilot aided schemes The elements are described in more details in the Ground direction...

Page 567: ...eristic impedance 1 DIR RCA ZR right blinder characteristic impedance ZR RGT BLD sin RGT BLD RCA 1 RGT BLD RCA 90 ZL left blinder characteristic impedance ZL LFT BLD sin LFT BLD RCA 1 LFT BLD RCA 90 K0 zero sequence compensating factor K0 Z0 Z1 MAG Z0 Z1 ANG 1 K0M mutual zero sequence compensating factor K0M 1 3 x Z0M Z1 MAG Z0M Z1 ANG non homogeneity angle setting NON HOMOGEN ANG b DIRECTIONAL MH...

Page 568: ... CA phase element IC IA Z VC VA and IC IA Z A ground element IA Z I_0 K0 Z IG K0M Z VA and I_0 Z B ground element IB Z I_0 K0 Z IG K0M Z VB and I_0 Z C ground element IC Z I_0 K0 Z IG K0M Z VC and I_0 Z If the mho characteristic is selected the limit angle of the comparator is adjustable concurrently with the limit angle of the mho characteristic resulting in a tent shape complementing the lens ch...

Page 569: ...B _1M BC phase element IB IC ZD and VB VC _1M CA phase element IC IA ZD and VC VA _1M A ground element I_0 ZD and VA_1M IA_2 ZD and VA_1M B ground element I_0 ZD and VB_1M IB_2 ZD and VB_1M C ground element I_0 ZD and VC_1M IC_2 ZD and VC_1M The characteristic and limit angles of the directional comparator are adjustable independently from the mho and reactance comparators The directional characte...

Page 570: ...PERVISION The overcurrent supervision responds to the following currents AB phase element IA IB BC phase element IB IC CA phase element IC IA A B C ground element 3 I_0 0 05 I_1 The following tables summarize the characteristics of the distance elements Table 9 1 DIRECTIONAL MHO PHASE DISTANCE FUNCTIONS CHARACTERISTIC COMPARATOR INPUTS LIMIT ANGLE Variable mho I Z V V_1M COMP LIMIT Reactance I Z V...

Page 571: ...DISTANCE FUNCTIONS CHARACTERISTIC COMPARATOR INPUTS LIMIT ANGLE Reactance I Z V j I_0 ej or j I_2 ej COMP LIMIT Directional I_0 ZD V_1M DIR COMP LIMIT Directional I_2 ZD V_1M DIR COMP LIMIT removed when 3I_0 OC SUPV and I_2 CUTOFF Right Blinder I ZR V I ZR 90 Left Blinder I ZL V I ZL 90 Fault type I_0 I_2 50 removed during open pole conditions or when 3I_0 OC SUPV and I_2 CUTOFF Zero sequence I_0 ...

Page 572: ...rents are from the protected line and are not affected by any compensation as the latter applies only to the reach defining comparators the mho reac tance and blinder characteristics 9 3 5 DISTANCE ELEMENTS ANALYSIS a DESCRIPTION This subsection shows how to analyze the operation of the distance elements in steady states using the results of short cir cuit studies All quantities are secondary ohms...

Page 573: ...tting the relay calculates K0 3 58 15 2 K0M 0 Z 14 00 88 ZD 1 88 ZR 9 99 2 ZL 4 99 178 For the assumed steady state injection the relay calculates VA_1 58 83 V 2 1 VA_1M 64 71 V 0 0 I_0 1 37 A 68 2 IA_2 1 37 A 68 1 V_0 29 18 V 8 4 VA VB _1 93 35 V 32 0 VA VB _1M 112 08 V 30 0 IA IB 7 39 A 109 1 b MHO PHASE A TO GROUND ELEMENT BEFORE MEMORY EXPIRES IA Z I_0 K0 Z IA K0M Z VA 103 33 V 3 9 VA_1M 64 71...

Page 574: ...nce angle 19 8 19 8 0 0 50 All four comparators and the overcurrent supervision are satisfied The Zone 1 MHO phase A ground element will operate for this fault Zero sequence directional difference angle for zones 2 and higher phase A 19 8 8 4 11 4 90 Zones 2 and hihger phase A ground elements will pick up time out and operate d MHO AB PHASE ELEMENT IA IB Z VA VB 88 65 V 78 7 VA VB _1M 112 08 V 30 ...

Page 575: ...fference angle 3 9 24 8 28 7 75 Zero sequence difference angle 19 8 0 0 19 8 75 Negative sequence directional difference angle 19 8 0 0 19 8 75 Right blinder difference angle 93 0 109 2 16 2 90 Left blinder difference angle 82 9 108 7 25 8 90 Fault type comparator difference angle 19 8 19 8 0 0 50 All six comparators and the overcurrent supervision are satisfied The Quad Phase A ground element wil...

Page 576: ...d power transformer and the direction of any given zone In the following equations the VT and CT locations are referenced as None if the transformer is not present between the CT VT and the intended reach point Otherwise the location is to be selected as a type of a transformer as seen from the VT CT position towards the intended reach point The following figure explains the adopted rules APPLICAT...

Page 577: ...URRENT TRANSFORMATION VOLTAGE TRANSFORMATION IAB_21P 3IC VAB_21P 1 3 VCA VBC IBC_21P 3IA VBC_21P 1 3 VAB VCA ICA_21P 3IB VCA_21P 1 3 VBC VAB IAB_21P 3IB VAB_21P 1 3 VAB VBC IBC_21P 3IC VBC_21P 1 3 VBC VCA ICA_21P 3IA VCA_21P 1 3 VCA VAB IAB_21P 1 3 2IA IB IC VAB_21P 3VA IBC_21P 1 3 2IB IA IC VBC_21P 3VB ICA_21P 1 3 2IC IA IB VCA_21P 3VC IAB_21P 1 3 IA IB 2IC VAB_21P 3VC IBC_21P 1 3 IB IC 2IA VBC_2...

Page 578: ...he location of the VTs regardless of the location of the CTs For more information on set tings please refer to Chapter 9 Application of Settings 9 4 2 EXAMPLE Consider the system shown below Figure 9 12 SAMPLE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Normally in order to respond to the fault shown in the figure a distance relay shall be applied at the relaying point X The relay input signals at this location are show...

Page 579: ...0 Thus 0 127 90 0 05779 85 0 1847 88 4 primary side or 2 569 88 4 on the secondary side The above example illustrates how the relay maintains correct reach for fault behind power transformers When installed at X the relay shall be set to 0 687 85 secondary in order to reach to the fault shown in the figure When installed at H the relay shall be set to 2 569 88 4 to ensure exactly same coverage See...

Page 580: ... for fault identification Figure 9 13 SINGLE POLE OPERATION The trip output element receives requests for single and three pole trips and three pole reclose initiation which it then pro cesses to generate outputs that are used to Determine whether a single or three pole operation should be performed Initiate tripping of breaker poles A B and C either individually or as a group Initiate breaker fai...

Page 581: ...is actually opened The TRIP PHASE A signal resets only after the breaker actually operates as indicated by its auxiliary contact At this moment the open pole detector responds to the breaker position and continues to indicate phase A opened This indication results in establishing blocking signals for distance elements OPEN POLE BLK AB OPEN POLE BLK CA operands are asserted If neutral and negative ...

Page 582: ...hase A as in the previous example The phase selector resets the open pole detector is activated and forces the zone 1 and zone 2 AG AB CA and negative sequence overcur rent elements to reset If the zone 1 BG element picks up or the zone 2 BG element picks up resulting in operation of the POTT scheme no trip command will be issued until the AR FORCE 3 P TRIP is asserted This happens 1 25 cycles aft...

Page 583: ...e current based algo rithm for example phase angles between the zero sequence negative sequence and positive sequence voltages are used The pre fault values are subtracted prior to any calculations The pre fault quantities are captured and the calculations start when the disturbance detector 50DD operates When an open pole is declared the phase selector resets all its outputs operands and ignores ...

Page 584: ... two or four bits Using a one bit channel the schemes at all terminals of the line use their local phase selectors to identify the fault type and initiate appropriate tripping actions In OPERAND DESCRIPTION PHASE SELECT AG Asserted when a phase A to ground fault is detected PHASE SELECT BG Asserted when a phase B to ground fault is detected PHASE SELECT CG Asserted when a phase C to ground fault i...

Page 585: ... relay has a setting that specifies the number of bits available on the associated communications channel This setting defines the input RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 and output TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 for communications and Scheme Abbreviation TRIP A TRIP B TRIP C TRIP 3P for action operands used by the scheme the data codes used to convey fault data between terminals and the method of combining information from the l...

Page 586: ...9 16 UNBLOCKING SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR 1 BIT CHANNELS REMOTE DATA LOCAL DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE TRIP OUTPUT RX1 LOG1 0 or 1 1 Any AG Fault DCUB TRIP A 0 or 1 1 Any BG Fault DCUB TRIP B 0 or 1 1 Any CG Fault DCUB TRIP C 0 or 1 1 Any AB ABG BC BCG CA CAG 3P Unrecognized DCUB TRIP 3P Table 9 17 PERMISSIVE SCHEME TRANSMIT CODES FOR ...

Page 587: ... ABG 3P Unrecognized BG 1 0 AG BC BCG BG 1 1 CG AB ABG 3P Unrecognized CG BC BCG CA CAG Trip Phase C 1 0 AG BC BCG CG 0 1 BG CA CAG CG 1 1 CG AB ABG 3P Unrecognized AB ABG 3P Unrecognized Trip Three Phases 1 0 AG BC BCG BC BCG Unrecognized 0 1 BG CA CAG CA CAG Unrecognized Table 9 21 BLOCKING SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR 2 BIT CHANNELS REMOTE DATA LOCAL DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE DETERMINATION OF F...

Page 588: ... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 BG CA CAG BG AB ABG BC BCG 3P DCUB TRIP B 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 CG AB ABG 3P unrecognized BG 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 AG BC BCG BG 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 AG BC BCG CG DCUB TRIP C 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 BG CA CAG CG 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 CG AB ABG 3P unrecognized CG BC BCG CA CAG 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 AG BC BCG BC BCG unrecognized DCUB TRIP 3P 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 BG CA CAG CA CAG unrecogn...

Page 589: ...DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE BIT PATTERN TRANSMITTED TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 AG 1 0 0 0 BG 0 1 0 0 CG 0 0 1 0 AB ABG BC BCG CA CAG 3P Unrecognized 0 0 0 1 Table 9 26 PERMISSIVE SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR 4 BIT CHANNELS REMOTE DATA LOCAL DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE TRIP OUTPUT RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 0 0 0 1 MULTI P AG Trip Phase A 0 1 0 0 BG AG 0 0 1 0 ...

Page 590: ...0 0 0 Any while the INIT signal was not established Trip as for single bit channel 1 1 1 0 MULTI P AG DIR BLOCK TRIP A 1 0 1 1 BG AG 1 1 0 1 CG AG 0 1 1 1 AG AG AB ABG CA CAG 3P Unrecognized 1 0 1 1 BG BG AB ABG BC BCG 3P Unrecognized DIR BLOCK TRIP B 0 1 1 1 AG BG 1 1 0 1 CG BG 1 1 1 0 MULTI P BG 1 1 0 1 CG CG BC BCG CA CAG 3P Unrecognized DIR BLOCK TRIP C 0 1 1 1 AG CG 1 0 1 1 BG CG 1 1 1 0 MULT...

Page 591: ... 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 AG AG AB ABG CA CAG 3P unrecognized 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 BG AG AB ABG CA CAG 3P unrecognized DCUB TRIP B 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 AG BG 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 CG 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 MULTI P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 CG CG BC BCG CA CAG 3P unrecognized DCUB TRIP C 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 AG CG 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 BG 0...

Page 592: ...ve signal back to the originating terminal if the line end open condition is recognized by the line pickup scheme and the fault is not identified as a reverse fault by the zone 4 or the ground directional overcurrent function if used The permissive echo is programmed as a one shot logic The echo is sent only once and then the echo logic locks out for a settable period The duration of the echo puls...

Page 593: ...forward looking either underreaching or overreaching distance zone A given Pilot Scheme analyzes this zone for fault type identi fication if the Phase Selector asserts its Void flag the DUTT scheme uses Z1 all the other schemes use Z2 The schemes analyze all six fault loops of the zone to determine the fault type For example simultaneous forward AG and reverse BG faults may result in the Void indi...

Page 594: ...owing protection elements will pickup Ground Distance Zone 1 2 and 3 for an AG fault At T2 the phase selector will determine the fault is type AG The reverse BG fault is likely to be ignored If a one bit channel is used terminal T1 will trip three poles but terminal T2 will trip phase A only see the Tables below which is undesirable If a two bit channel is used both terminals will trip phase A onl...

Page 595: ... determines which line segment is faulted and another part that locates the fault on the faulted segment Each terminal may report a slightly different fault resistance The algorithm achieves greater accuracy by removing the line charging current The fault location algorithm does not need to explicitly determine the composite voltage at the fault Instead it eliminates the fault voltage from the equ...

Page 596: ...o unfaulted segments Therefore the differences between each pair of estimates is calculated as follows EQ 9 50 The faulted segment is selected as follows EQ 9 51 Where EQ 9 52 A similar set of equations is applied to determine whether the fault is between the tap and the local terminal or between the tap and remote terminal 1 Next having all the data prepared the following universal equation is us...

Page 597: ... positive sequence impedances and length for the line are shown below The three relays are connected as shown below Table 9 31 CT AND VT APPLICATION DATA FOR MULTI ENDED EXAMPLE VALUE RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 CT primary 1200 A 1000 A 1600 A CT secondary 5 A 1 A 5 A VT connection wye delta wye VT secondary 57 73 V 83 33 V 57 73 V VT ratio 5000 1 6000 1 5000 1 Table 9 32 TAP SETTINGS MULTI ENDED EXAM...

Page 598: ... relay 2 secondary ohms 1 0707 sec ohms relay 3 to tap in relay 3 secondary ohms Remote 1 to tap 1 7520 sec ohms relay 2 to tap in relay 1 secondary ohms 3 5483 sec ohms relay 1 to tap in relay 2 secondary ohms 1 3626 sec ohms relay 1 to tap in relay 3 secondary ohms Remote 2 to tap 0 8030 sec ohms relay 3 to tap in relay 1 secondary ohms 2 7883 sec ohms relay 3 to tap in relay 2 secondary ohms 2 ...

Page 599: ...and remote 2 terminal Therefore the fault must be between the local terminal relay 2 and the tap Looking from relay 3 there is no fault between the tap and the remote 1 terminal and between the tap and the local ter minal Therefore the fault must be between the remote 2 terminal relay 2 and the tap Note that the correct value of the tap voltage is equal for all three relays This is expected since ...

Page 600: ...The data above results in the following fault locations Relay 1 fault location 0 4173 pu or 0 4173 120 km 50 0704 km from its remote terminal 1 relay 2 Relay 2 fault location 0 4172 pu or 0 4172 120 km 50 07 km from local terminal relay 2 Relay 3 fault location 0 4173 pu or 0 4173 120 km 50 0704 km from its remote terminal 2 relay 2 The actual fault location in this example was 50 00km from relay ...

Page 601: ...in phase The figure below shows an equivalent system for fault location Figure 9 18 EQUIVALENT SYSTEM FOR FAULT LOCATION The following equations hold true for this equivalent system EQ 9 55 where m sought pu distance to fault Z positive sequence impedance of the line The currents from the local and remote systems can be parted between their fault F and pre fault load pre components EQ 9 56 and neg...

Page 602: ...ual phase to ground voltages If the VTs are connected in delta fault location is suspended If the FAULT REPORT 1 VT SUBSTITUTION setting value is V0 and the VTs are connected in a wye configuration the fault location is performed based on the actual phase to ground voltages If the VTs are connected in a delta configuration fault location is performed based on the delta voltages and externally supp...

Page 603: ...e s tap respective to the given relay SETTINGS SETTING FAULT REPORT SOURCE SHOT FROM AUTO RECLOSURE FAULT REPORT TRIG IA 3I_0 IC IB SRC 50DD OP X VA or VAB VC or VCA VB or VBC 827094A5 CDR Off 0 AND FAULT LOCATOR 1 RUN 0 3 SEC ACTUAL VALUES DATE TIME FAULT TYPE FAULT LOCATION FAULT RECLOSE SHOT FAULT REPORT Vn or V_0 FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 MAG FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 ANGLE FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 MAG FAULT REPORT ...

Page 604: ...9 58 L90 Line Current Differential System GE Multilin 9 6 FAULT LOCATOR 9 THEORY OF OPERATION 9 ...

Page 605: ...than the maximum continuous current but not extremely high relative to maximum load because the differential element minimum sensitivity setting is approximately 0 2 CT rating the L90 relay allows for different CT ratings at each of the terminals 3 The VA rating of the CTs should be above the Secondary Burden CT Rated Secondary Current The maximum sec ondary burden for acceptable performance is EQ...

Page 606: ...rated secondary current without exceeding a maximum ratio error of 5 to a burden of EQ 10 7 The total Burden Rr Rl 0 008 0 52 0 528 which is less than the allowed 0 6 which is OK The following procedure verifies the kneepoint voltage 1 The maximum voltage available from the 2 The system X R ratio 3 The CT voltage for maximum phase fault is EQ 10 8 4 The CT voltage for maximum ground fault is EQ 10...

Page 607: ...er terminals do not this setting should be increased by approxi mately 20 to 50 depending on how heavily saturated the one CT is while the other CTs are not saturated of CT rating to prevent operation on a close in external fault 10 2 3 CURRENT DIFF RESTRAINT 1 This setting controls the element characteristic when current is below the breakpoint where CT errors and saturation effects are not expec...

Page 608: ...s Consider a two terminal configuration with the following CT ratios for relays 1 and 2 EQ 10 10 Consequently we have the following CT tap value for relays 1 and 2 EQ 10 11 To achieve maximum differential sensitivity the minimum pickup is set as 0 2 pu at the terminal with the higher CT primary current in this case 2000 5 for relay 2 The other terminal pickup is adjusted accordingly The pickup val...

Page 609: ... as follows EQ 10 18 EQ 10 19 To verify the calculated values we have EQ 10 20 This satisfies the equality condition indicated earlier During on load tests the differential current at all terminals should be the same and generally equal to the charging current if the tap and CT ratio settings are chosen correctly Pickup relay 1 0 4 Pickup relay 2 0 2 Pickup relay 3 0 8 Breakpoint relay 2 Breakpoin...

Page 610: ...ule three phase CT inputs CT bank F CT2 circuitry is connected to the F1 to F3 terminals of the L8F module three phase CT inputs CT bank L VT1 circuitry is connected to the F8 terminals of the F8F module single phase VT for synchrocheck 1 VT bank F VT2 circuitry is connected to the F8 terminals of the L8F module single phase VT for synchrocheck 2 VT bank L VT3 circuitry is connected to the F5 to F...

Page 611: ...nt source for breaker failure 2 and voltage source for synchrocheck 2 Source 3 Current source for distance backup overcurrent voltage source for distance voltage source for synchrocheck 1 and 2 Source 4 Voltage source for synchrocheck 1 The EnerVista UR Setup configuration is shown below 4 Sources are assigned accordingly in the specific element menus For current differential set CURRENT DIFF SIGN...

Page 612: ... 2 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL 87L SETTINGS 10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 10 For breaker failure 1 and 2 make the following settings changes EnerVista UR Setup example shown For synchrocheck 1 and 2 make the following settings changes EnerVista UR Setup example shown ...

Page 613: ...he line side of the line to be protected Taking full advantage of L90 capability to support up to 4 directly connected CTs the relay can be applied to protect both line and buses as shown below Proper CT VT modules must be ordered for such applications The varying CT ratios at the breakers can be compensated locally by using the sources mechanism and with the CT TAP settings between remote relays ...

Page 614: ...ETHOD 1 Enable GPS compensation on the loss of the GPS signal at any terminal and continue to operate the 87L element until a change in the channel round trip delay is detected If GPS is enabled at all terminals and the GPS signal is present the L90 compensates for the channel asymmetry On the loss of the GPS signal the L90 stores the last measured value of the channel asymmetry per channel and co...

Page 615: ...vailable This pro vides less sensitive protection on GPS signal loss at any terminal and runs with higher pickup and restraint settings This approach can be used carefully if maximum channel asymmetry is known and doesn t exceed certain values 2 0 to 2 5 ms The 87L DIFF MAX ASYM operand can be used to monitor and signal maximum channel asymmetry Essentially the L90 switches to another setting grou...

Page 616: ...gs for Settings Groups 1 and 2 as shown below 3 Enable GPS compensation when the GPS signal is valid and switch to Settings Group 2 with more sensitive settings as shown below 831778A1 CDR 17 87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM 18 NOT 19 87L DIFF GPS FAIL 20 NOT 21 AND 2 AND 2 22 87L DIFF 1 MAX ASYM 23 87L DIFF GPS FAIL 24 OR 2 OR 2 25 TIMER 3 26 LATCH Reset Set LATCH 27 GPS ON GR 2 VO2 GPS ON GR 2 VO2 ...

Page 617: ...e for the backup ground distance and the zero sequence compensation term is also not accurate so that the positive sequence reach setting must be increased to com pensate The phase distance reach setting may also have to be increased to cope with a transfer across the two transform ers but this is dependent on the termination and configuration of the parallel line Three terminal line applications ...

Page 618: ...l conditions and blocking the distance elements to using it and accepting the fact that the distance protection will not respond to subsequent internal faults until the problem is addressed To be fully operational the Fuse Failure element must be enabled and its output FlexLogic operand must be indi cated as the blocking signal for the selected protection elements For convenience the current super...

Page 619: ...balance under maximum load conditions This element should not be used to prevent an output when the load impedance is inside the distance characteristic on a steady state basis b GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 1 The zone 1 reach must be set so that nominally instantaneous operation does not extend beyond the end of the protected line However this may be somewhat more complicated than for the phase elements ...

Page 620: ...reverse looking This strategy can be beneficial if the reduced reach enhances the discrimination between the load and fault conditions It should be recognized however that if adopted this approach must be implemented at both ends of the protected line f GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 5 An additional fifth ground distance zone can be used in special applications This zone may be start zone for arming trip pi...

Page 621: ...gnal must be transmitted in a potentially noisy situation due to the fault The scheme output operand DUTT OP must be configured to interface with other relay functions output contacts in par ticular in order to make the scheme fully operational Typically the output operand should be programmed to initiate a trip breaker fail and auto reclose and drive a user programmable LED as per user applicatio...

Page 622: ...c built into their design as part of the technique used to improve ground fault directionality Unlike the distance protection elements the ground directional overcurrent functions do not have their reach well defined therefore the current reversal logic is incorporated for the extra signal supplementing Zone 2 in the scheme The transient blocking approach for this POTT scheme is to recognize that ...

Page 623: ...nction with the Zone 4 distance element for better time and sensitivity coordination For proper operation of the scheme the Zone 2 and 4 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled configured and set per rules of distance relaying If used by this scheme the selected ground directional overcurrent function s must be enabled configured and set accord ingly The scheme generates output operands...

Page 624: ... supervises all scheme functions All timers are fully adjustable with typical values indicated Lockout of the directional comparison unblocking scheme is established as follows Lockout of the scheme is started for a time duration set by DCUB LOG TRIP WINDOW setting if The scheme is enabled and not blocked that is the scheme is active and no permissive RX signal is received and any loss of guard si...

Page 625: ...und directional forward function if configured and the reverse zone 4 distance elements or ground directional reverse function if configured did not pickup to set the transient blocking If these conditions are met then the scheme will key the channel s by means of asserting transmit signals DCUB TX1 through DCUB TX4 with the aid of the local phase selector or zone 2 distance elements e KEYING OF T...

Page 626: ... in complex relations with fault and system parameters no solid setting recommendations are given with respect to extra security margin for sub synchronous oscillations It is strongly rec ommended to use a power system simulator to verify the reach settings or to use an adaptive L90 feature for dynamic reach control If the adaptive reach control feature is used the PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL setting s...

Page 627: ...ve sequence directional overcurrent protection element for the Sample Series Compensated System For the Sending Bus relay bus side VTs Net inductive reactance from the relay into the local system 2 3 1 0 there is no need for offset Net inductive reactance from relay through far end busbar 4 10 3 3 the offset cannot be higher than 3 It is recommended to use 1 5 offset impedance For the Sending Bus ...

Page 628: ...he restraint current is calculated in a similar way When the ZERO SEQ CURRENT REMOVAL feature is enabled the modified I_0 removed differential current in all three phases is shown in the ACTUAL VALUES METERING 87L DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT menu Local and remote currents values are not changed 10 7 2 TRANSFORMER LOAD CURRENTS As the tapped line may be energized from one terminal only or there may be a l...

Page 629: ...s and the LV sides are interconnected detailed short circuit studies may be needed to determine the distance settings 10 7 4 EXTERNAL GROUND FAULTS External ground faults behind the line terminals will be seen by the overreaching distance elements At the same time the tapped transformer s if connected in a grounded wye will feed the zero sequence current This current is going to be seen at one L90...

Page 630: ...ce between signal frequency and tracking frequency To secure instantaneous element operation it is recommended either to use FlexLogic as shown below to block the instan taneous elements during synchronization or to use a different setting group with more conservative pickup for this brief interval Figure 10 5 FLEXLOGIC TO BLOCK INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENT DURING 87L STARTUP The elements must be treated...

Page 631: ...s toward the reach point Otherwise the VT connection setting shall be set to None 5 The reach setting is entered in secondary ohms and as such must take into account location and ratios of VTs and CTs as well as voltage ratio of the involved power transformer The following equations explain the setting rules Consider two applications as shown in the figure below PHASE DISTANCE LOOKING THROUGH A PO...

Page 632: ...itive sequence impedance of the transformer The VTs are located on the other side of the transformer thus transformer ratio must be included 10 9 2 EXAMPLE Given the following for the system shown in the previous section ZX 30 85 intended reach of Zone 1 ZH 0 06 88 intended reach of Zone nCT 8000 5 1600 located at H nVT 315000 120 2625 located at X Transformer 13 8 315 kV 150 MVA 10 delta wye 315 ...

Page 633: ...the following setting change in both relays TESTING CHANNEL TESTS LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST LOCAL LOOPBACK CHANNEL NUMBER 1 10 Initiate the Local Loopback Channel Tests by making the following setting change TESTING CHANNEL TESTS LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST LOCAL LOOPBACK FUNCTION Yes Expected result In a few seconds Yes should change to Local Loopback Test PASSED and then to No signify ing the test was success...

Page 634: ...f 130 s All tests are verified by using PFLL status displays All PFLL status displays must be either OK or Fail 1 Ensure that Steps 1 through 7 inclusive of the previous section are completed 2 Verify and record that both relays have established communications with the following checks after 60 to 120 seconds ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TESTS CHANNEL 1 2 STATUS OK ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CHANNEL TES...

Page 635: ...until the relay operates and note the pickup value The theoretical value of operating current below the breakpoint is given by the following formula where P is the pickup setting and S1 is the Slope 1 setting in decimal format EQ 11 1 Repeat the above test for different slope and pickup settings if desired Repeat the above tests for Phases B and C 4 Minimum pickup test with local current and simul...

Page 636: ...he Off state 9 Apply current to phase A of the remote relay and increase until 87L operates 10 At the Local relay observe ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT OUTPUTS Cont Op N1 is now in the On state 11 Repeat steps 8 through 10 for phases A and B and observe Contact Outputs N2 and N3 respectively 12 Repeat steps 8 through 11 with the Remote and Local relays inter changed 13 Make the following setting ch...

Page 637: ...nitude 5812 RGF 6 Igd Mag Amps Restricted ground fault 6 differential ground current magnitude 5814 RGF 6 Igr Mag Amps Restricted ground fault 6 restricted ground current magnitude 5824 Field RTD 1 Value Field RTD 1 value 5825 Field RTD 2 Value Field RTD 2 value 5826 Field RTD 3 Value Field RTD 3 value 5827 Field RTD 4 Value Field RTD 4 value 5828 Field RTD 5 Value Field RTD 5 value 5829 Field RTD...

Page 638: ...tral current angle 6228 SRC 2 Ig RMS Amps Source 2 ground current RMS 6230 SRC 2 Ig Mag Degrees Source 2 ground current magnitude 6232 SRC 2 Ig Angle Amps Source 2 ground current angle 6233 SRC 2 I_0 Mag Degrees Source 2 zero sequence current magnitude 6235 SRC 2 I_0 Angle Amps Source 2 zero sequence current angle 6236 SRC 2 I_1 Mag Degrees Source 2 positive sequence current magnitude 6238 SRC 2 I...

Page 639: ...RC 4 Ig Mag Degrees Source 4 ground current magnitude 6360 SRC 4 Ig Angle Amps Source 4 ground current angle 6361 SRC 4 I_0 Mag Degrees Source 4 zero sequence current magnitude 6363 SRC 4 I_0 Angle Amps Source 4 zero sequence current angle 6364 SRC 4 I_1 Mag Degrees Source 4 positive sequence current magnitude 6366 SRC 4 I_1 Angle Amps Source 4 positive sequence current angle 6367 SRC 4 I_2 Mag De...

Page 640: ...voltage RMS 6737 SRC 2 Vbc RMS Volts Source 2 phase BC voltage RMS 6739 SRC 2 Vca RMS Volts Source 2 phase CA voltage RMS 6741 SRC 2 Vab Mag Volts Source 2 phase AB voltage magnitude 6743 SRC 2 Vab Angle Degrees Source 2 phase AB voltage angle 6744 SRC 2 Vbc Mag Volts Source 2 phase BC voltage magnitude 6746 SRC 2 Vbc Angle Degrees Source 2 phase BC voltage angle 6747 SRC 2 Vca Mag Volts Source 2 ...

Page 641: ... RMS 6854 SRC 4 Vag Mag Volts Source 4 phase AG voltage magnitude 6856 SRC 4 Vag Angle Degrees Source 4 phase AG voltage angle 6857 SRC 4 Vbg Mag Volts Source 4 phase BG voltage magnitude 6859 SRC 4 Vbg Angle Degrees Source 4 phase BG voltage angle 6860 SRC 4 Vcg Mag Volts Source 4 phase CG voltage magnitude 6862 SRC 4 Vcg Angle Degrees Source 4 phase CG voltage angle 6863 SRC 4 Vab RMS Volts Sour...

Page 642: ...phase B reactive power 7214 SRC 2 Qc Vars Source 2 phase C reactive power 7216 SRC 2 S VA Source 2 three phase apparent power 7218 SRC 2 Sa VA Source 2 phase A apparent power 7220 SRC 2 Sb VA Source 2 phase B apparent power 7222 SRC 2 Sc VA Source 2 phase C apparent power 7224 SRC 2 PF Source 2 three phase power factor 7225 SRC 2 Phase A PF Source 2 phase A power factor 7226 SRC 2 Phase B PF Sourc...

Page 643: ...urce 1 real power demand 7688 SRC 1 Demand var Vars Source 1 reactive power demand 7690 SRC 1 Demand Va VA Source 1 apparent power demand 7696 SRC 2 Demand Ia Amps Source 2 phase A current demand 7698 SRC 2 Demand Ib Amps Source 2 phase B current demand 7700 SRC 2 Demand Ic Amps Source 2 phase C current demand 7702 SRC 2 Demand Watt Watts Source 2 real power demand 7704 SRC 2 Demand var Vars Sourc...

Page 644: ...fault Vc Ang 0 Degrees Fault 1 post fault phase C voltage angle 9060 Fault Type 0 Fault 1 type 9061 Fault Location 0 Fault 1 location 9216 Synchchk 1 Delta V Volts Synchrocheck 1 delta voltage 9218 Synchchk 1 Delta F Hz Synchrocheck 1 delta frequency 9219 Synchchk 1 Delta Phs Degrees Synchrocheck 1 delta phase 9220 Synchchk 2 Delta V Volts Synchrocheck 2 delta voltage 9222 Synchchk 2 Delta F Hz Sy...

Page 645: ... IG 9400 Local IG Mag Amps Local IG magnitude 9405 Local IG Angle Degrees Local IG angle 9406 Terminal 1 IG Mag Amps Remote 1 IG magnitude 9408 Terminal 1 IG Angle Degrees Remote 1 IG angle 9409 Terminal 2 IG Mag Amps Remote 2 IG magnitude 9411 Terminal 2 IG Angle Amps Remote 2 IG angle The following fault locator FlexAnalog parameters 9412 to 9420 values are only available if all relays are conne...

Page 646: ... Freq Hz Phasor measurement unit 1 frequency 9580 PMU 1 df dt Hz s Phasor measurement unit 1 rate of change of frequency 9581 PMU 1 Conf Ch Phasor measurement unit 1 configuration change counter 12306 Oscill Num Triggers Oscillography number of triggers 13504 DCMA Inputs 1 Value mA dcmA input 1 actual value 13506 DCMA Inputs 2 Value mA dcmA input 2 actual value 13508 DCMA Inputs 3 Value mA dcmA in...

Page 647: ... actual value 13575 RTD Inputs 24 Value RTD input 24 actual value 13576 RTD Inputs 25 Value RTD input 25 actual value 13577 RTD Inputs 26 Value RTD input 26 actual value 13578 RTD Inputs 27 Value RTD input 27 actual value 13579 RTD Inputs 28 Value RTD input 28 actual value 13580 RTD Inputs 29 Value RTD input 29 actual value 13581 RTD Inputs 30 Value RTD input 30 actual value 13582 RTD Inputs 31 Va...

Page 648: ... 1 41134 VTFF 2 V0 3rd Harmonic V0 3rd Harmonic 2 41136 VTFF 3 V0 3rd Harmonic V0 3rd Harmonic 3 41138 VTFF 4 V0 3rd Harmonic V0 3rd Harmonic 4 41140 VTFF 5 V0 3rd Harmonic V0 3rd Harmonic 5 41142 VTFF 6 V0 3rd Harmonic V0 3rd Harmonic 6 45584 GOOSE Analog In 1 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 45586 GOOSE Analog In 2 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 2 45588 GOOSE Analog In 3 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input...

Page 649: ...Degrees Distance IagZ Vag angle 5 63517 Dist IbgZ Vbg Ang 1 Degrees Distance IbgZ Vbg angle 1 63518 Dist IbgZ Vbg Ang 2 Degrees Distance IbgZ Vbg angle 2 63519 Dist IbgZ Vbg Ang 3 Degrees Distance IbgZ Vbg angle 3 63520 Dist IbgZ Vbg Ang 4 Degrees Distance IbgZ Vbg angle 4 63521 Dist IbgZ Vbg Ang 5 Degrees Distance IbgZ Vbg angle 5 63522 Dist IcgZ Vcg Ang 1 Degrees Distance IcgZ Vcg angle 1 63523 ...

Page 650: ...R V IcaZR Ang 3 Degrees Distance IcaZL Vca IcaZL angle 3 63564 IcaZR V IcaZR Ang 4 Degrees Distance IcaZL Vca IcaZL angle 4 63565 IcaZR V IcaZR Ang 5 Degrees Distance IcaZL Vca IcaZL angle 5 63566 IagZR V IagZR Ang 1 Degrees Distance IagZR Vag IagZR angle 1 63567 IagZR V IagZR Ang 2 Degrees Distance IagZR Vag IagZR angle 2 63568 IagZR V IagZR Ang 3 Degrees Distance IagZR Vag IagZR angle 3 63569 Ia...

Page 651: ...PMU 1 STAT PMU 1 STAT flags 9968 GOOSE UInt Input 1 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 1 9970 GOOSE UInt Input 2 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 2 9972 GOOSE UInt Input 3 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 3 9974 GOOSE UInt Input 4 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 4 9976 GOOSE UInt Input 5 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 5 9978 GOOSE UInt Input 6 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 6 9980 GOOSE UInt Input 7 IEC61850 GOO...

Page 652: ...A 16 L90 Line Current Differential System GE Multilin A 1 PARAMETER LISTS APPENDIX A A ...

Page 653: ... 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 28800 33600 38400 57600 or 115200 bps are available Even odd and no parity are avail able Refer to the Communications section of chapter 5 for further details The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate The relay will not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relay s ...

Page 654: ...ission all slaves start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave B 1 4 CRC 16 ALGORITHM The CRC 16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream data bits only start stop and parity ignored as one contin uous binary number This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial 11000000000000101B The 16 bit remainder of the d...

Page 655: ...starting address will determine the type of data being read Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets The example shows a master device requesting three register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h 17 decimal the slave device responds with the val ues 40 300 and 0 from registers 4050h 4051h and 4052h r...

Page 656: ...SMISSION EXAMPLE MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE HEX PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE HEX SLAVE ADDRESS 11 SLAVE ADDRESS 11 FUNCTION CODE 05 FUNCTION CODE 05 OPERATION CODE high 00 OPERATION CODE high 00 OPERATION CODE low 01 OPERATION CODE low 01 CODE VALUE high FF CODE VALUE high FF CODE VALUE low 00 CODE VALUE low 00 CRC low DF CRC low DF CRC high 6A CRC high 6A Table B 5 SUMMARY ...

Page 657: ...f the function code set to 1 The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets The example shows a master device sending the unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11 Table B 7 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE HEX PACKET FORMAT EXMAPLE HEX SLAVE ADDRESS 11 SLAVE ADDRESS 11 FUNCTION CODE 10 FUNCTIO...

Page 658: ...file transfer information so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus connections b OTHER PROTOCOLS All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols for example TFTP or MMS c COMTRADE OSCILLOGRAPHY AND DATA LOGGER FILES Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE C37 111 ...

Page 659: ...n 0x3020 For example if 14 fault reports have occurred then the files faultReport5 htm faultReport6 htm up to faultReport14 htm are available to be read The expected use of this feature has an external master periodically poll ing the Number of Fault Reports register If the value changes then the master reads all the new files The contents of the file is in standard HTML notation and can be viewed...

Page 660: ...sword timer The value read at memory location 4010 can be used to confirm whether a command password is enabled or disabled a value of 0 represents disabled The value read at mem ory location 4011 can be used to confirm whether a setting password is enabled or disabled Command or setting password security access is restricted to the particular port or particular TCP IP connection on which the entr...

Page 661: ...Last Key Pressed 0 to 47 1 F530 0 None Keypress Emulation Read Write 0280 Simulated keypress write zero before each keystroke 0 to 46 1 F190 0 No key use between real keys Virtual Input Commands Read Write Command 64 modules 0400 Virtual Input 1 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0401 Virtual Input 2 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0402 Virtual Input 3 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0403 Virtual Input 4 State 0 to 1 ...

Page 662: ...48 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0430 Virtual Input 49 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0431 Virtual Input 50 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0432 Virtual Input 51 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0433 Virtual Input 52 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0434 Virtual Input 53 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0435 Virtual Input 54 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0436 Virtual Input 55 State 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 0437 Virtual Input 56 State 0 to 1 ...

Page 663: ...1553 Remote Double Point Status Input 3 State 0 to 3 1 F605 3 Bad 1554 Remote Double Point Status Input 4 State 0 to 3 1 F605 3 Bad 1555 Remote Double Point Status Input 5 State 0 to 3 1 F605 3 Bad Direct Input Output States Read Only 15A0 Direct Input 1 1 State 8 items 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 15A8 Direct Input 1 2 State 8 items 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 15B0 Direct Input 1 State 0 to 65535 1 F500 0 15B1 Di...

Page 664: ...nds Read Write Command 1630 L90 Channel Status Clear 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No 87L Channel Status Actuals Read Only 1638 Channel 1 Asymmetry 65 535 to 65 535 ms 0 001 F004 0 163A Channel 2 Asymmetry 99 999 to 99 999 ms 0 001 F004 0 Sensitive Directional Power Actuals Read Only 2 modules 1680 Sensitive Directional Power 1 Power 2147483647 to 2147483647 W 1 F060 0 1682 Sensitive Directional Power 2 Power 2...

Page 665: ...rce 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 181C Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 181E Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 181F Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 1821 Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 1822 Source 1 Differen...

Page 666: ...060 0 1C04 Source 1 Phase B Real Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 W 0 001 F060 0 1C06 Source 1 Phase C Real Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 W 0 001 F060 0 1C08 Source 1 Three Phase Reactive Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 var 0 001 F060 0 1C0A Source 1 Phase A Reactive Power 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 var 0 001 F060 0 1C0C Source 1 Phase B Reactive Power 1000000000000 to 10000000...

Page 667: ...ce 5 1E50 Repeated for Source 6 Source Demand Peaks Read Only Non Volatile 6 modules 1E80 Source 1 Demand Ia Maximum 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 1E82 Source 1 Demand Ia Maximum Date 0 to 4294967295 1 F050 0 1E84 Source 1 Demand Ib Maximum 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 1E86 Source 1 Demand Ib Maximum Date 0 to 4294967295 1 F050 0 1E88 Source 1 Demand Ic Maximum 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 1E...

Page 668: ... Repeated for module number 2 Breaker Arcing Current Actuals Read Only Non Volatile 6 modules 21EE Repeated for module number 2 Breaker Arcing Current Actuals Read Only Non Volatile 6 modules 21F0 Repeated for module number 2 Breaker Arcing Current Actuals Read Only Non Volatile 6 modules 21F2 Repeated for module number 2 Breaker Arcing Current Actuals Read Only Non Volatile 6 modules 21FA Repeate...

Page 669: ...00 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 V 1 F060 0 2402 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency 0 to 655 35 Hz 0 01 F001 0 2403 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase 0 to 359 9 degrees 0 1 F001 0 2404 Repeated for Synchrocheck 2 2408 Repeated for Synchrocheck 3 240C Repeated for Synchrocheck 4 Autoreclose Status Read Only 6 modules 2410 Autoreclose 1 Count 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 2411 Autoreclose 2...

Page 670: ...01 F060 0 24C0 Terminal 1 IG Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 24C1 Terminal 2 IG Magnitude 0 to 999999 999 A 0 001 F060 0 24C3 Terminal 2 IG Angle 359 9 to 0 degrees 0 1 F002 0 Current differential composite voltage actual values Read Only 24C4 Line current differential 87L local composite voltage magnitude 0 to 999999 999 V 0 001 F060 0 24C6 Line current differential 87L local composite voltag...

Page 671: ...nge Counter 0 to 655 35 0 01 F001 0 256E Reserved 4 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 Phasor measurement unit integer values read only actual value registers 4 modules 2608 PMU 1 SOC timestamp 0 to 4294967295 seconds 1 F003 0 260A PMU 1 FRAMESEC timestamp 0 to 4294967295 seconds 1 F003 0 260C PMU 1 STAT flags 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 Remote double point status inputs read write setting registers 5 modules 262...

Page 672: ...tput States one per register 64 items 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off 2E00 Virtual Output States one per register 96 items 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off Expanded Remote Input Output Status Read Only 2F00 Remote Device States one per register 16 items 0 to 1 1 F155 0 Offline 2F80 Remote Input States one per register 64 items 0 to 1 1 F108 0 Off Oscillography Values Read Only 3000 Oscillography Number of Triggers 0 to 65...

Page 673: ... 1 F003 0 332E Syslog Server Port Number 0 to 65535 1 F001 514 Security Supervisory Read Write Setting 3331 Device Authentication Enable 0 to 1 1 F126 1 Yes 3332 Supervisor Role Enable 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 3333 Lock Relay 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 3334 Factory Service Mode Enable 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 3335 Failed Authentication Alarm Enable 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled 3336 Firmware Lock Alarm 0 ...

Page 674: ...A Inputs 24 Value 9999999 to 9999999 1 F004 0 RTD Input Values Read Only 48 modules 34F0 RTD Input 1 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 34F1 RTD Input 2 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 34F2 RTD Input 3 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 34F3 RTD Input 4 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 34F4 RTD Input 5 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 34F5 RTD Input 6 Value 32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 0 34F6 RTD Input 7 Value...

Page 675: ...us Configuration Read Write Setting 3735 Undefined 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 56554706 3737 Undefined 1 to 65535 1 F001 1812 3738 Undefined 1 to 65535 1 F001 1813 3739 Undefined 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 56554706 373B Undefined 0 to 65535 1 F001 1812 373D Undefined 0 to 65535 1 F001 1813 373F Undefined 1 F619 0 EAP TTLS 3740 Undefined 1 to 65535 1 F001 2910 3741 Undefined 0 to 9999 sec 1 F001 10 3742 Und...

Page 676: ...6 1 F247 0 none 3891 Remote Phase CT x Origin 2 0 to 16 1 F247 0 none 3892 Remote Ground CT x Origin 1 0 to 16 1 F248 0 none 3893 Remote Ground CT x Origin 2 0 to 16 1 F248 0 none 3894 AC Bank Redundancy Type 0 to 2 1 F261 1 Dependability Biased 3895 Remote Phase CT 1 Primary 1 to 65000 1 F001 1 3896 Remote Phase CT 1 Secondary 0 to 1 1 F123 0 1 A 3897 Remote Ground CT 1 Primary 1 to 65000 1 F001 ...

Page 677: ...ield Contact Input 28 3A34 Repeated for Field Contact Input 29 3A3F Repeated for Field Contact Input 30 3A4A Repeated for Field Contact Input 31 3A55 Repeated for Field Contact Input 32 3A60 Repeated for Field Contact Input 33 3A6B Repeated for Field Contact Input 34 3A76 Repeated for Field Contact Input 35 3A81 Repeated for Field Contact Input 36 3A8C Repeated for Field Contact Input 37 3A97 Repe...

Page 678: ...3 3DEE Repeated for Field Contact Output 4 3DFB Repeated for Field Contact Output 5 3E08 Repeated for Field Contact Output 6 3E15 Repeated for Field Contact Output 7 3E22 Repeated for Field Contact Output 8 Field Unit Shared Outputs Read Write Setting 16 modules 3E30 Field Shared Output 1 ID 0 to 65535 F205 SO 1 3E36 Field Shared Output 1 Operate 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 3E38 Field Shared Output 1...

Page 679: ...ld Unit Transducer 8 Field Unit Identifiers Read Only 8 modules 3FB8 Attached Field Unit 1 Serial Number 1 F205 none 3FBE Attached Filed Unit 1 Port Number 1 F001 0 3FBF Attached Field Unit 1 Type 0 to 3 1 F243 0 CC 05 3FC0 Field Unit 1 Status 0 to 4 1 F262 0 Disabled 3FC1 Repeated for Field Unit 2 3FCA Repeated for Field Unit 3 3FD3 Repeated for Field Unit 4 3FDC Repeated for Field Unit 5 3FE5 Re...

Page 680: ...oss Alert 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 4098 Port 2 Link Loss Alert 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 4099 Port 3 Link Loss Alert 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 409A DNP Channel 1 Port 0 to 5 1 F177 0 None 409B DNP Channel 2 Port 0 to 5 1 F177 0 None 409C DNP Address 0 to 65519 1 F001 1 409E DNP Client Addresses 2 items 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 0 40A3 TCP Port Number for the Modbus protocol 0 to 65535 1 F001 502 40A4 T...

Page 681: ... 5 104 redundancy port 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No 4105 Port 2 IP Address 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 56554706 4107 Port 2 IP Subnet Mask 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 4294966272 4109 Port 2 Gateway IP Address 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 56554497 410B PRT2 Ethernet Operation Mode 0 to 1 1 F192 1 Full Duplex 410C PRT2 Redundancy Enabled 0 to 2 1 F627 0 None 410D Port 3 IP Address 0 to 4294967295 1 F003 56554706 410F Port 3 ...

Page 682: ...ST Start Hour 0 to 23 1 F001 2 41AE Daylight Savings Time DST Stop Month 0 to 11 1 F237 0 January 41AF Daylight Savings Time DST Stop Day 0 to 6 1 F238 0 Sunday 41B0 Daylight Savings Time DST Stop Day Instance 0 to 4 1 F239 0 First 41B1 Daylight Savings Time DST Stop Hour 0 to 23 1 F001 2 Fault Report Commands Read Write Command 41B2 Fault Reports Clear Data Command 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No Oscillograph...

Page 683: ...Repeated for User Programmable LED 34 4326 Repeated for User Programmable LED 35 4329 Repeated for User Programmable LED 36 432C Repeated for User Programmable LED 37 432F Repeated for User Programmable LED 38 4332 Repeated for User Programmable LED 39 4335 Repeated for User Programmable LED 40 4338 Repeated for User Programmable LED 41 433B Repeated for User Programmable LED 42 433E Repeated for ...

Page 684: ...ry 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 1 4481 Phase CT 1 Secondary 0 to 1 1 F123 0 1 A 4482 Ground CT 1 Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 1 4483 Ground CT 1 Secondary 0 to 1 1 F123 0 1 A 4484 Repeated for CT Bank 2 4488 Repeated for CT Bank 3 448C Repeated for CT Bank 4 4490 Repeated for CT Bank 5 4494 Repeated for CT Bank 6 VT Settings Read Write Setting 3 modules 4500 Phase VT 1 Connection 0 to 1 1 F100 0 Wye 4501 Ph...

Page 685: ...1 close 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 47D9 Breaker 1 phase A three pole closed 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 47DB Breaker 1 phase B closed 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 47DD Breaker 1 phase C closed 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 47DF Breaker 1 external alarm 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 47E1 Breaker 1 alarm delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F003 0 47E3 Breaker 1 pushbutton control 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 47E4 Breaker 1 manual c...

Page 686: ...0 4E05 Raw Field Data AC2 Angle 0 to 0 1 degree 0 1 F002 0 4E06 Raw Field Data AC3 Mag 0 to 0 001 A 0 001 F003 0 4E08 Raw Field Data AC3 Angle 0 to 0 01 degree 0 1 F002 0 4E09 Raw Field Data AC4 Mag 0 to 0 001 A 0 001 F003 0 4E0B Raw Field Data AC4 Angle 0 to 0 01 degree 0 1 F002 0 4E0C Raw Field Data AC5 Mag 0 to 0 001 A V 0 001 F003 0 4E0E Raw Field Data AC5 Angle 0 to 0 01 degree 0 1 F002 0 4E0...

Page 687: ...nput 2 5428 Repeated for RTD Input 3 543C Repeated for RTD Input 4 5450 Repeated for RTD Input 5 5464 Repeated for RTD Input 6 5478 Repeated for RTD Input 7 548C Repeated for RTD Input 8 54A0 Repeated for RTD Input 9 54B4 Repeated for RTD Input 10 54C8 Repeated for RTD Input 11 54DC Repeated for RTD Input 12 54F0 Repeated for RTD Input 13 5404 Repeated for RTD Input 14 5518 Repeated for RTD Input ...

Page 688: ...Logic Timer 11 5858 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 12 5860 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 13 5868 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 14 5870 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 15 5878 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 16 5880 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 17 5888 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 18 5890 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 19 5898 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 20 58A0 Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 21 58A8 Repeated f...

Page 689: ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 5 5A5F Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 6 5A72 Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 7 5A85 Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 8 5A98 Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 9 5AAB Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 10 5ABE Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 11 5AD1 Repeated for Phase Instantaneous O...

Page 690: ...04 0 Instantaneous 5D07 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 5D09 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 5D0A Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 5D0B Reserved 6 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 5D11 Repeated for Ground Time Overcurrent 2 5D22 Repeated for Ground Time Overcurrent 3 5D33 Repeated for Ground Time Overcurrent 4 5D44 Repeated for Gro...

Page 691: ... Seal In Pickup 0 2 to 0 8 pu 0 01 F001 20 5EE9 87L Trip Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 5EEA 87L Trip Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled Stub Bus Read Write Grouped Setting 5F10 Stub Bus Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 5F11 Stub Bus Disconnect 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 5F13 Stub Bus Trigger 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 5F15 Stub Bus Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 5F17 Stub Bus Events 0 to 1 1 F102...

Page 692: ... Continuous Monitor I OP 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6133 Continuous Monitor I Supervision 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6135 Continuous Monitor V OP 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6137 Continuous Monitor V Supervision 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6139 Continuous Monitor Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 613A Continuous Monitor Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Read Write Grouped Se...

Page 693: ...ay 1 Reset 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 50 65CD Power Swing Detect Delay 2 Pickup 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 17 65CE Power Swing Detect Delay 3 Pickup 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 9 65CF Power Swing Detect Delay 4 Pickup 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 17 65D0 Power Swing Detect Seal In Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 400 65D1 Power Swing Detect Trip Mode 0 to 1 1 F514 0 Delayed 65D2 Power Swing Detect Block 0 to 4...

Page 694: ...o 4294967295 1 F300 0 6765 Trip 3 Pole Input3 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6767 Trip 3 Pole Input4 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6769 Trip 3 Pole Input5 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 676B Trip 3 Pole Input6 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 676D Trip 1 Pole Input1 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 676F Trip 1 Pole Input2 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6771 Trip 1 Pole Input3 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6773 Trip 1 Pole Input4 0 to 429496...

Page 695: ...PUTT 1P Rx2 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 67F2 PUTT 1P Rx3 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 67F4 PUTT 1P Rx4 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 67F6 PUTT 1P Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 67F7 PUTT 1P Event 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 67F8 PUTT 1P Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 67FA Reserved 5 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 Pilot Hybrid POTT 1P Read Write Setting 6820 Hybrid POTT 1P Scheme Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 6821 ...

Page 696: ...Close 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6867 Autoreclose Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 6868 Autoreclose Block Time Manual Close 0 to 655 35 s 0 01 F001 1000 6869 Autoreclose 1P Initiate 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 686B Autoreclose 3P Initiate 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 686D Autoreclose 3P TD Initiate 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 686F Autoreclose Multi Phase Fault 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 6871 Autoreclose Breake...

Page 697: ...of Guard Trip Window 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 150 68B2 Directional Comparison Unblocking Seal In Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 10 68B3 Directional Comparison Unblocking Communication Bits 0 to 2 1 F198 0 1 bit 68B4 Directional Comparison Unblocking Rx1 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 68B6 Directional Comparison Unblocking LOG1 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 68B8 Directional Comparison Unblocking Rx2 0 to 4294...

Page 698: ...it 30 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90 7075 Phase Distance Zone 1 Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 7076 Phase Distance Zone 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 7078 Phase Distance Zone 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 7079 Phase Distance Zone 1 Events 0 to 1 F102 0 Disabled 707A Phase Distance Zone 1 Shape 0 to 1 1 F120 0 Mho 707B Phase Distance Zone 1 RCA 30 to 90 degrees 1 F001 85 707C Phase Distance Zon...

Page 699: ...y 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 90 71E6 Line Pickup OV Pickup Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 40 71E7 Autoreclose Coordination Pickup Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 45 71E8 Autoreclose Coordination Reset Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 5 71E9 Autoreclose Coordination Bypass 0 to 1 1 F102 1 Enabled 71EA Line Pickup Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 71EC Line Pickup Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 71ED Line...

Page 700: ...rectional Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 726B Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 726C Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Offset 0 to 250 ohms 0 01 F001 0 726D Neg Seq Directional Overcurrent 1 Pos Seq Restraint 0 to 0 5 0 001 F001 63 726E Reserved 3 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 7271 Repeated for Neg Seq Directional Overcurrent 2 Disconnect S...

Page 701: ... PMU 1 Power Trigger Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 7821 PMU 1 Power Trigger Active 0 25 to 3 pu 0 001 F001 1250 7822 PMU 1 Power Trigger Reactive 0 25 to 3 pu 0 001 F001 1250 7823 PMU 1 Power Trigger Apparent 0 25 to 3 pu 0 001 F001 1250 7824 PMU 1 Power Trigger Pickup Time 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 10 7825 PMU 1 Power Trigger Dropout Time 0 to 600 s 0 01 F001 100 7826 PMU 1 Power Trigger Block 3 i...

Page 702: ...number 2 1 to 65535 1 F001 4714 Phasor Measurement Unit Calibration Read Write Setting 4 modules 7919 PMU Va Calibration Angle 5 to 5 0 05 F002 0 791A PMU Va Calibration Magnitude 95 to 105 0 1 F002 1000 791B PMU Vb Calibration Angle 5 to 5 0 05 F002 0 791C PMU Vb Calibration Magnitude 95 to 105 0 1 F002 1000 791D PMU Vc Calibration Angle 5 to 5 0 05 F002 0 791E PMU Vc Calibration Magnitude 95 to ...

Page 703: ...ogrammable Pushbutton 1 Top Line F202 none 7B6B User Programmable Pushbutton 1 On Text F202 none 7B75 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text F202 none 7B7F User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop Out Time 0 to 60 s 0 05 F001 0 7B80 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 7B81 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 7B82 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 LE...

Page 704: ...100 7F66 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Block 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 7F68 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 7F69 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 7F6A Reserved 7 items 0 to 65535 1 F001 0 7F71 Repeated for Auxiliary Undervoltage 2 7F82 Repeated for Auxiliary Undervoltage 3 Auxiliary Overvoltage Read Write Grouped Setting 3 modules 7FA0 Auxiliary Overvol...

Page 705: ...01 1050 861B Breaker Failure 1 Loset Time 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 861C Breaker Failure 1 Trip Dropout Delay 0 to 65 535 s 0 001 F001 0 861D Breaker Failure 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset 861E Breaker Failure 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled 861F Breaker Failure 1 Phase A Initiate 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 8621 Breaker Failure 1 Phase B Initiate 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 8623 Breaker Failure...

Page 706: ...ent 29 8C7E Repeated for Digital Element 30 8C94 Repeated for Digital Element 31 8CAA Repeated for Digital Element 32 8CC0 Repeated for Digital Element 33 8CD6 Repeated for Digital Element 34 8CEC Repeated for Digital Element 35 8D02 Repeated for Digital Element 36 8D18 Repeated for Digital Element 37 8D2E Repeated for Digital Element 38 8D44 Repeated for Digital Element 39 8D5A Repeated for Digit...

Page 707: ...r FlexElement 3 903F Repeated for FlexElement 4 9054 Repeated for FlexElement 5 9069 Repeated for FlexElement 6 907E Repeated for FlexElement 7 9093 Repeated for FlexElement 8 90A8 Repeated for FlexElement 9 90BD Repeated for FlexElement 10 90D2 Repeated for FlexElement 11 90E7 Repeated for FlexElement 12 90FC Repeated for FlexElement 13 9111 Repeated for FlexElement 14 9126 Repeated for FlexEleme...

Page 708: ... dcmA Output 15 93BA Repeated for dcmA Output 16 93C0 Repeated for dcmA Output 17 93C6 Repeated for dcmA Output 18 93CC Repeated for dcmA Output 19 93D2 Repeated for dcmA Output 20 93D8 Repeated for dcmA Output 21 93DE Repeated for dcmA Output 22 93E4 Repeated for dcmA Output 23 93EA Repeated for dcmA Output 24 IEC 61850 Received Integers Read Write Setting 16 modules 98A0 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger ...

Page 709: ...ved 2 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 9941 Repeated for breaker restrike 2 VT Fuse Failure Read Write Setting 6 modules A09A VT Fuse Failure Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled A09B VT Fuse Failure Neutral Wire Open Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled A09C VT Fuse Failure Neutral Wire Open 3rd Harmonic Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0 001 F001 100 A09D Repeated for module number 2 A0A0 Repeated for module number 3 A0A3 Repea...

Page 710: ...65535 ms 1 F011 0 Non Volatile Latches Read Write Setting 16 modules A700 Non Volatile Latch 1 Function 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled A701 Non Volatile Latch 1 Type 0 to 1 1 F519 0 Reset Dominant A702 Non Volatile Latch 1 Set 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A704 Non Volatile Latch 1 Reset 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A706 Non Volatile Latch 1 Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset A707 Non Volatile Latch 1 Events 0 to...

Page 711: ...Ground Directional Overcurrent Forward 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A83B POTT1 1P Number of Communication Bits 0 to 2 1 F198 0 1 A83C POTT1 1P Rx1 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A83E POTT1 1P Rx2 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A840 POTT1 1P Rx3 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A842 POTT1 1P Rx4 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 A844 POTT1 1P Target 0 to 2 1 F109 0 Self reset A845 POTT1 1P Event 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled A846 POTT1...

Page 712: ...for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 2 AA0E Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 3 AA15 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 4 AA1C Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 5 AA23 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 6 AA2A Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 7 AA31 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 8 AA38 Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 9 AA3F Repeated for IEC ...

Page 713: ... 0 to 65534 1 F206 none AD3D IEC 61850 logical node GGIOx name prefix 5 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none AD4C IEC 61850 logical node RFLOx name prefix 5 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none AD5B IEC 61850 logical node XCBRx name prefix 6 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none AD6D IEC 61850 logical node PTRCx name prefix 6 items 0 to 65534 1 F206 none AD7F IEC 61850 logical node PDIFx name prefix 6 items 0 to 65534 1 F...

Page 714: ...tion MAC Address F072 0 B067 IEC 61850 GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority 0 to 7 1 F001 4 B068 IEC 61850 GOOSE VLAN ID 0 to 4095 1 F001 0 B069 IEC 61850 GOOSE ETYPE APPID 0 to 16383 1 F001 0 B06A Reserved 2 items 0 to 1 1 F001 0 IEC 61850 Server Configuration Read Write Settings Commands B06C TCP Port Number for the IEC 61850 MMS Protocol 0 to 65535 1 F001 102 B06D IEC 61850 Logical Device Name F213 IEC...

Page 715: ...001 F003 10000 B0F6 Repeated for Deadband 2 B12C Repeated for Deadband 3 B162 Repeated for Deadband 4 B198 Repeated for Deadband 5 B1CE Repeated for Deadband 6 IEC 61850 Received Analogs Read Only 32 modules B210 IEC 61850 Received Analog 1 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 0 001 F060 0 B212 Repeated for Received Analog 2 B214 Repeated for Received Analog 3 B216 Repeated for Received Analog 4 B218 Re...

Page 716: ... for wattmetric ground fault 3 B336 Repeated for wattmetric ground fault 4 B348 Repeated for wattmetric ground fault 5 Wattmetric ground fault actual values read only 5 modules B360 Wattmetric ground fault 1 operating power 0 to 999999 999 W 0 001 F060 0 B362 Repeated for wattmetric ground fault 2 B364 Repeated for wattmetric ground fault 3 B366 Repeated for wattmetric ground fault 4 B368 Repeated...

Page 717: ...ms 0 5 F001 20 BB08 Repeated for Contact Input 2 BB10 Repeated for Contact Input 3 BB18 Repeated for Contact Input 4 BB20 Repeated for Contact Input 5 BB28 Repeated for Contact Input 6 BB30 Repeated for Contact Input 7 BB38 Repeated for Contact Input 8 BB40 Repeated for Contact Input 9 BB48 Repeated for Contact Input 10 BB50 Repeated for Contact Input 11 BB58 Repeated for Contact Input 12 BB60 Rep...

Page 718: ...eated for Contact Input 55 BCB8 Repeated for Contact Input 56 BCC0 Repeated for Contact Input 57 BCC8 Repeated for Contact Input 58 BCD0 Repeated for Contact Input 59 BCD8 Repeated for Contact Input 60 BCE0 Repeated for Contact Input 61 BCE8 Repeated for Contact Input 62 BCF0 Repeated for Contact Input 63 BCF8 Repeated for Contact Input 64 BD00 Repeated for Contact Input 65 BD08 Repeated for Conta...

Page 719: ...or Virtual Input 4 BE60 Repeated for Virtual Input 5 BE6C Repeated for Virtual Input 6 BE78 Repeated for Virtual Input 7 BE84 Repeated for Virtual Input 8 BE90 Repeated for Virtual Input 9 BE9C Repeated for Virtual Input 10 BEA8 Repeated for Virtual Input 11 BEB4 Repeated for Virtual Input 12 BEC0 Repeated for Virtual Input 13 BECC Repeated for Virtual Input 14 BED8 Repeated for Virtual Input 15 B...

Page 720: ...Input 60 C100 Repeated for Virtual Input 61 C10C Repeated for Virtual Input 62 C118 Repeated for Virtual Input 63 C124 Repeated for Virtual Input 64 Virtual Outputs Read Write Setting 96 modules C130 Virtual Output 1 Name F205 Virt Op 1 C136 Virtual Output 1 Events 0 to 1 1 F102 0 Disabled C137 Reserved F001 0 C138 Repeated for Virtual Output 2 C140 Repeated for Virtual Output 3 C148 Repeated for ...

Page 721: ...ed for Virtual Output 47 C2A8 Repeated for Virtual Output 48 C2B0 Repeated for Virtual Output 49 C2B8 Repeated for Virtual Output 50 C2C0 Repeated for Virtual Output 51 C2C8 Repeated for Virtual Output 52 C2D0 Repeated for Virtual Output 53 C2D8 Repeated for Virtual Output 54 C2E0 Repeated for Virtual Output 55 C2E8 Repeated for Virtual Output 56 C2F0 Repeated for Virtual Output 57 C2F8 Repeated f...

Page 722: ...ory Read Write Command C434 Relay Reboot Command 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No C438 Save Volatile Data 0 to 1 1 F126 0 No Clear Records Read Write Setting C446 Clear Demand Operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C450 Clear Fault Reports operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C454 Clear Event Records operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C456 Clear Oscillography operand 0 to 4294967295 1 F300 0 C458 Clear Data Logger operand ...

Page 723: ... Setting 32 modules CB00 Remote Device 1 GSSE GOOSE Application ID F209 Remote Device 1 CB21 Remote Device 1 GOOSE Ethernet APPID 0 to 16383 1 F001 0 CB22 Remote Device 1 GOOSE Dataset 0 to 16 1 F184 0 Fixed CB24 Undefined 0 to 3 1 F626 0 None CB25 Repeated for Device 2 CB4A Repeated for Device 3 CB6F Repeated for Device 4 CB94 Repeated for Device 5 CBB9 Repeated for Device 6 CBDE Repeated for Dev...

Page 724: ...A Repeated for Remote Input 18 D054 Repeated for Remote Input 19 D05E Repeated for Remote Input 20 D068 Repeated for Remote Input 21 D072 Repeated for Remote Input 22 D07C Repeated for Remote Input 23 D086 Repeated for Remote Input 24 D090 Repeated for Remote Input 25 D09A Repeated for Remote Input 26 D0A4 Repeated for Remote Input 27 D0AE Repeated for Remote Input 28 D0B8 Repeated for Remote Inpu...

Page 725: ...emote Output 6 D238 Repeated for Remote Output 7 D23C Repeated for Remote Output 8 D240 Repeated for Remote Output 9 D244 Repeated for Remote Output 10 D248 Repeated for Remote Output 11 D24C Repeated for Remote Output 12 D250 Repeated for Remote Output 13 D254 Repeated for Remote Output 14 D258 Repeated for Remote Output 15 D25C Repeated for Remote Output 16 D260 Repeated for Remote Output 17 D26...

Page 726: ...n Read Write Setting 64 modules D320 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO1 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 2 D321 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO2 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 2 D322 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO3 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 2 D323 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO4 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 2 D324 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO5 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 2 D325 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO6 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F00...

Page 727: ...IO2 CF SPCSO45 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 2 D34D IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO46 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 2 D34E IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO47 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 2 D34F IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO48 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 2 D350 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO49 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 2 D351 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO50 ctlModel Value 0 to 2 1 F001 2 D352 IEC 61850 GGIO2 CF SPCSO51 ctlMode...

Page 728: ...U x IDcode 1 to 65534 1 F001 1 D423 PMU x STN F203 GE UR PMU D42B PMU x Source 0 to 5 1 F167 0 SRC 1 D42C PMU x Class 0 to 2 1 F549 1 Class M D42D PMU x Format 0 to 1 1 F547 0 Integer D42E PMU x Style 0 to 1 1 F546 0 Polar D42F PMU x Rate 0 to 13 1 F544 4 10 sec D430 PMU x PHS x 14 items 0 to 14 1 F543 1 Va D43E PMU x PHS x Name 14 items F203 GE UR PMU PHS 1 D4AE PMU x A CH x 16 items 0 to 65535 1...

Page 729: ... for Contact Output 29 DE43 Repeated for Contact Output 30 DE52 Repeated for Contact Output 31 DE61 Repeated for Contact Output 32 DE70 Repeated for Contact Output 33 DE7F Repeated for Contact Output 34 DE8E Repeated for Contact Output 35 DE9D Repeated for Contact Output 36 DEAC Repeated for Contact Output 37 DEBB Repeated for Contact Output 38 DECA Repeated for Contact Output 39 DED9 Repeated for...

Page 730: ...E147 Repeated for dcmA Inputs 14 E15A Repeated for dcmA Inputs 15 E16D Repeated for dcmA Inputs 16 E180 Repeated for dcmA Inputs 17 E193 Repeated for dcmA Inputs 18 E1A6 Repeated for dcmA Inputs 19 E1B9 Repeated for dcmA Inputs 20 E1CC Repeated for dcmA Inputs 21 E1DF Repeated for dcmA Inputs 22 E1F2 Repeated for dcmA Inputs 23 E205 Repeated for dcmA Inputs 24 Phasor Measurement Unit Aggregator Re...

Page 731: ...rocheck 1 V2 Source 0 to 5 1 F167 1 SRC 2 EC03 Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Voltage Difference 0 to 400000 V 1 F060 10000 EC05 Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Angle Difference 0 to 100 degrees 1 F001 30 EC06 Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Frequency Difference 0 to 2 Hz 0 01 F001 100 EC07 Synchrocheck 1 Dead Source Select 0 to 5 1 F176 1 LV1 and DV2 EC08 Synchrocheck 1 Dead V1 Maximum Voltage 0 to 1 25 pu 0 01 F001 30 EC...

Page 732: ...B indicates the number of decimal points to display Example Current values are stored as 32 bit numbers with three decimal places and base units in Amps If the retrieved value is 12345 678 A and the display scale equals 0x0302 then the dis played value on the unit is 12 35 kA F013 POWER_FACTOR SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER Positive values indicate lagging power factor negative values indicate leading F040...

Page 733: ...ENSITY 0 25 1 50 2 75 3 100 F102 ENUMERATION DISABLED ENABLED 0 Disabled 1 Enabled F103 ENUMERATION CURVE SHAPES F104 ENUMERATION RESET TYPE 0 Instantaneous 1 Timed 2 Linear F105 ENUMERATION LOGIC INPUT 0 Disabled 1 Input 1 2 Input 2 F106 ENUMERATION PHASE ROTATION 0 ABC 1 ACB F108 ENUMERATION OFF ON 0 Off 1 On F109 ENUMERATION CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION 0 Self reset 1 Latched 2 Disabled F110 ENUMER...

Page 734: ...10 28800 3 4800 7 57600 11 33600 mask value mask value mask value mask value 0 0 00 30 0 88 60 2 90 90 5 90 1 0 05 31 0 90 61 3 00 91 6 00 2 0 10 32 0 91 62 3 10 92 6 50 3 0 15 33 0 92 63 3 20 93 7 00 4 0 20 34 0 93 64 3 30 94 7 50 5 0 25 35 0 94 65 3 40 95 8 00 6 0 30 36 0 95 66 3 50 96 8 50 7 0 35 37 0 96 67 3 60 97 9 00 8 0 40 38 0 97 68 3 70 98 9 50 9 0 45 39 0 98 69 3 80 99 10 00 10 0 48 40 1...

Page 735: ... Overcurrent 1 65 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 66 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 3 67 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 4 68 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 5 69 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 6 70 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 7 71 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 8 72 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 9 73 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 10 74 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 11 75 ...

Page 736: ...utton 5 395 Control pushbutton 6 396 Control pushbutton 7 400 FlexElement 1 401 FlexElement 2 402 FlexElement 3 403 FlexElement 4 bitmask element 404 FlexElement 5 405 FlexElement 6 406 FlexElemen 7 407 FlexElement 8 420 Non volatile Latch 1 421 Non volatile Latch 2 422 Non volatile Latch 3 423 Non volatile Latch 4 424 Non volatile Latch 5 425 Non volatile Latch 6 426 Non volatile Latch 7 427 Non ...

Page 737: ...57 RTD Input 9 858 RTD Input 10 859 RTD Input 11 860 RTD Input 12 861 RTD Input 13 862 RTD Input 14 bitmask element 863 RTD Input 15 864 RTD Input 16 865 RTD Input 17 866 RTD Input 18 867 RTD Input 19 868 RTD Input 20 869 RTD Input 21 870 RTD Input 22 871 RTD Input 23 872 RTD Input 24 873 RTD Input 25 874 RTD Input 26 875 RTD Input 27 876 RTD Input 28 877 RTD Input 29 878 RTD Input 30 879 RTD Inpu...

Page 738: ...5 x 16 cycles 2 7 x 32 cycles 3 3 x 64 cycles 4 1 x 128 cycles F137 ENUMERATION USER PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON FUNCTION 0 Disabled 1 Self Reset 2 Latched F138 ENUMERATION OSCILLOGRAPHY FILE TYPE 0 Data File 1 Configuration File 2 Header File F139 ENUMERATION DEMAND CALCULATIONS 0 Thermal Exponential 1 Block Interval 2 Rolling Demand F140 ENUMERATION CURRENT SENS CURRENT VOLTAGE DISABLED 0 Disabled 1...

Page 739: ...r 23 Process Bus Trouble 24 Brick Trouble 25 Field RTD Trouble 26 Field TDR Trouble 27 Remote Device Offline 28 Direct Device Offline 29 Maintenance Alert 30 Any Minor Error 31 Any Major Error 33 Maintenance Alert 64 Maintenance Alert 65 IEC 61850 Data Set 66 Aggregator Error 67 Unit Not Calibrated 68 Settings Save Error 69 SRAM Data Error 70 Program Memory 71 Watchdog Error 72 Low On Memory 73 Pr...

Page 740: ... Offline 21 Ethernet Port 2 Offline 22 Ethernet Port 3 Offline 23 Ethernet Port 4 Offline 24 Ethernet Port 5 Offline 25 Ethernet Port 6 Offline 26 Test Mode Isolated 27 Test Mode Forcible 28 Test Mode Disabled 29 Temperature Warning On 30 Temperature Warning Off 31 Unauthorized Access 32 System Integrity Recovery 33 System Integrity Recovery 06 34 System Integrity Recovery 07 bitmask fault type bi...

Page 741: ...UT OUTPUT RANGE bitmask value bitmask value 0 NONE 35 UserSt 3 1 DNA 1 36 UserSt 4 2 DNA 2 37 UserSt 5 3 DNA 3 38 UserSt 6 4 DNA 4 39 UserSt 7 5 DNA 5 40 UserSt 8 6 DNA 6 41 UserSt 9 7 DNA 7 42 UserSt 10 8 DNA 8 43 UserSt 11 9 DNA 9 44 UserSt 12 10 DNA 10 45 UserSt 13 11 DNA 11 46 UserSt 14 12 DNA 12 47 UserSt 15 13 DNA 13 48 UserSt 16 14 DNA 14 49 UserSt 17 15 DNA 15 50 UserSt 18 16 DNA 16 51 Use...

Page 742: ...ENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT TYPE 0 Neg Sequence 1 Zero Sequence F180 ENUMERATION PHASE GROUND 0 PHASE 1 GROUND F181 ENUMERATION ODD EVEN NONE 0 ODD 1 EVEN 2 NONE F183 ENUMERATION AC INPUT WAVEFORMS F184 ENUMERATION REMOTE DEVICE GOOSE DATASET F185 ENUMERATION PHASE A B C GROUND SELECTOR 0 A 1 B 2 C 3 G F186 ENUMERATION MEASUREMENT MODE 0 Phase to Ground 1 Phase to Phase bitmask synchrocheck dead ...

Page 743: ... TEXT4 4 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT F208 TEXT2 2 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT F211 ENUMERATION SOURCE SELECTION 0 None 1 SRC 1 2 SRC 2 3 SRC 3 4 SRC 4 5 SRC 5 6 SRC 6 F213 TEXT32 32 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT F220 ENUMERATION PUSHBUTTON MESSAGE PRIORITY bitmsk keypress bitmsk keypress 0 use between real keys 23 Reset 24 User 1 1 1 25 User 2 2 2 26 User 3 3 3 27 User programmable key 1 4 4 28 User programmable key 2 5...

Page 744: ...63 MMXU1 MX PPV phsAB cVal ang f 264 MMXU1 MX PPV phsBC cVal mag f 265 MMXU1 MX PPV phsBC cVal ang f 266 MMXU1 MX PPV phsCA cVal mag f 267 MMXU1 MX PPV phsCA cVal ang f 268 MMXU1 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 269 MMXU1 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 270 MMXU1 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 271 MMXU1 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 272 MMXU1 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 273 MMXU1 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 274 MMXU1 MX A phsA cVal mag f 27...

Page 745: ...ng f 356 MMXU3 MX W phsA cVal mag f 357 MMXU3 MX W phsB cVal mag f 358 MMXU3 MX W phsC cVal mag f 359 MMXU3 MX VAr phsA cVal mag f value GOOSE dataset item 360 MMXU3 MX VAr phsB cVal mag f 361 MMXU3 MX VAr phsC cVal mag f 362 MMXU3 MX VA phsA cVal mag f 363 MMXU3 MX VA phsB cVal mag f 364 MMXU3 MX VA phsC cVal mag f 365 MMXU3 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 366 MMXU3 MX PF phsB cVal mag f 367 MMXU3 MX PF ph...

Page 746: ...PhV phsC cVal ang f 459 MMXU6 MX A phsA cVal mag f 460 MMXU6 MX A phsA cVal ang f 461 MMXU6 MX A phsB cVal mag f 462 MMXU6 MX A phsB cVal ang f 463 MMXU6 MX A phsC cVal mag f 464 MMXU6 MX A phsC cVal ang f 465 MMXU6 MX A neut cVal mag f value GOOSE dataset item 466 MMXU6 MX A neut cVal ang f 467 MMXU6 MX W phsA cVal mag f 468 MMXU6 MX W phsB cVal mag f 469 MMXU6 MX W phsC cVal mag f 470 MMXU6 MX V...

Page 747: ...IO3 MX AnIn14 mag f 143 GGIO3 MX AnIn15 mag f value GOOSE dataset item 144 GGIO3 MX AnIn16 mag f 145 GGIO3 MX AnIn17 mag f 146 GGIO3 MX AnIn18 mag f 147 GGIO3 MX AnIn19 mag f 148 GGIO3 MX AnIn20 mag f 149 GGIO3 MX AnIn21 mag f 150 GGIO3 MX AnIn22 mag f 151 GGIO3 MX AnIn23 mag f 152 GGIO3 MX AnIn24 mag f 153 GGIO3 MX AnIn25 mag f 154 GGIO3 MX AnIn26 mag f 155 GGIO3 MX AnIn27 mag f 156 GGIO3 MX AnIn...

Page 748: ...PE 0 CC 05 1 CV 05 2 CC 01 3 CV 01 F244 ENUMERATION PROCESS CARD PORT 0 H4a 1 H4b 2 H3a 3 H3b 4 H2a 5 H2b 6 H1a 7 H1b F245 ENUMERATION TEST MODE FUNCTION F257 ENUMERATION PROCESS CARD DSP CONFIGURATION F260 ENUMERATION DATA LOGGER MODE 0 Continuous 1 Trigger 197 GGIO3 ST UIntIn16 stVal value voltage 0 Calculated VN 1 Measured VX value current 0 Calculated IN 1 Measured IG value month 0 January 1 F...

Page 749: ... 34 NOT 1 INPUT 36 2 INPUT XOR 0 38 LATCH SET RESET 2 inputs 40 OR 2 to 16 inputs 42 AND 2 to 16 inputs 44 NOR 2 to 16 inputs 46 NAND 2 to 16 inputs 48 TIMER 1 to 32 50 ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 to 64 52 ONE SHOT 54 SELF TEST ERROR see F141 for range 56 PLATFORM DIRECT INPUT 1 to 96 58 PLATFORM DIRECT OUTPUT 1 to 96 60 PLATFORM DIRECT DEVICE 1 to 8 62 MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS see F146 for range 64 PDC N...

Page 750: ...ER SWING TRIP MODE 0 Delayed 1 Early F515 ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE 0 Signed 1 Absolute F516 ENUMERATION ELEMENT COMPARE MODE 0 Level 1 Delta F517 ENUMERATION ELEMENT DIRECTION OPERATION 0 Over 1 Under F518 ENUMERATION FLEXELEMENT UNITS 0 Milliseconds 1 Seconds 2 Minutes bitmask element state 0 Pickup 1 Operate 2 Pickup Phase A 3 Pickup Phase B 4 Pickup Phase C 5 Operate Phase A 6 Operate Pha...

Page 751: ...Symm 5 Point 3 Symm 7 Point 4 Class M 5 Class P F542 ENUMERATION PMU TRIGGERING MODE 0 Automatic Overwrite 1 Protected F543 ENUMERATION PMU PHASORS bitmask default variation 0 1 1 2 2 5 3 6 bitmask Default Variation 0 1 1 2 2 9 3 10 bitmask default variation 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 value keypress value keypress value keypress 0 None 15 3 33 User PB 3 1 Menu 16 Enter 34 User PB 4 2 Message Up 17 Me...

Page 752: ... ENUMERATION REMOTE DOUBLE POINT STATUS INPUT F607 ENUMERATION OPEN POLE DETECTOR MODE F608 ENUMERATION OPEN POLE DETECTION FUNCTION value rate value rate 0 1 second 7 20second 1 2 second 8 25 second 2 4 second 9 30 second 3 5 second 10 50 second 4 10 second 11 60 second 5 12 second 12 100 second 6 15 second 13 120 second Enumeration In zone transformer connnection 0 None 1 0 lag 2 30 lag 3 60 lag...

Page 753: ...18 PDIS5 ST Op general 19 PDIS6 ST Str general 20 PDIS6 ST Op general 21 PDIS7 ST Str general 22 PDIS7 ST Op general 23 PDIS8 ST Str general 24 PDIS8 ST Op general 25 PDIS9 ST Str general 26 PDIS9 ST Op general 27 PDIS10 ST Str general 28 PDIS10 ST Op general 29 PIOC1 ST Str general 30 PIOC1 ST Op general 31 PIOC2 ST Str general 32 PIOC2 ST Op general 33 PIOC3 ST Str general 34 PIOC3 ST Op general...

Page 754: ...T Str general 122 PIOC47 ST Op general 123 PIOC48 ST Str general 124 PIOC48 ST Op general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 125 PIOC49 ST Str general 126 PIOC49 ST Op general 127 PIOC50 ST Str general 128 PIOC50 ST Op general 129 PIOC51 ST Str general 130 PIOC51 ST Op general 131 PIOC52 ST Str general 132 PIOC52 ST Op general 133 PIOC53 ST Str general 134 PIOC53 ST Op general 135 PIOC54 S...

Page 755: ...T Op general 227 PTOV4 ST Str general 228 PTOV4 ST Op general 229 PTOV5 ST Str general 230 PTOV5 ST Op general Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 231 PTOV6 ST Str general 232 PTOV6 ST Op general 233 PTOV7 ST Str general 234 PTOV7 ST Op general 235 PTOV8 ST Str general 236 PTOV8 ST Op general 237 PTOV9 ST Str general 238 PTOV9 ST Op general 239 PTOV10 ST Str general 240 PTOV10 ST Op general...

Page 756: ...FltDiskm mag f 331 RFLO5 MX FltDiskm mag f 332 RPSB1 ST Str general 333 RPSB1 ST Op general 334 RPSB1 ST BlkZn stVal 335 RREC1 ST Op general 336 RREC1 ST AutoRecSt stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 337 RREC2 ST Op general 338 RREC2 ST AutoRecSt stVal 339 RREC3 ST Op general 340 RREC3 ST AutoRecSt stVal 341 RREC4 ST Op general 342 RREC4 ST AutoRecSt stVal 343 RREC5 ST Op general 344 ...

Page 757: ...T Ind33 stVal 440 GGIO1 ST Ind34 stVal 441 GGIO1 ST Ind35 stVal 442 GGIO1 ST Ind36 stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 443 GGIO1 ST Ind37 stVal 444 GGIO1 ST Ind38 stVal 445 GGIO1 ST Ind39 stVal 446 GGIO1 ST Ind40 stVal 447 GGIO1 ST Ind41 stVal 448 GGIO1 ST Ind42 stVal 449 GGIO1 ST Ind43 stVal 450 GGIO1 ST Ind44 stVal 451 GGIO1 ST Ind45 stVal 452 GGIO1 ST Ind46 stVal 453 GGIO1 ST Ind47...

Page 758: ... 61850 report dataset items 549 MMXU1 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 550 MMXU1 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 551 MMXU1 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 552 MMXU1 MX A phsA cVal mag f 553 MMXU1 MX A phsA cVal ang f 554 MMXU1 MX A phsB cVal mag f 555 MMXU1 MX A phsB cVal ang f 556 MMXU1 MX A phsC cVal mag f 557 MMXU1 MX A phsC cVal ang f 558 MMXU1 MX A neut cVal mag f 559 MMXU1 MX A neut cVal ang f 560 MMXU1 MX W phsA cVal ...

Page 759: ... phsAB cVal ang f 653 MMXU4 MX PPV phsBC cVal mag f 654 MMXU4 MX PPV phsBC cVal ang f Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 655 MMXU4 MX PPV phsCA cVal mag f 656 MMXU4 MX PPV phsCA cVal ang f 657 MMXU4 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 658 MMXU4 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 659 MMXU4 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 660 MMXU4 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 661 MMXU4 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 662 MMXU4 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 663 M...

Page 760: ...al mag f 752 MMXU6 MX VA phsB cVal mag f 753 MMXU6 MX VA phsC cVal mag f 754 MMXU6 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 755 MMXU6 MX PF phsB cVal mag f 756 MMXU6 MX PF phsC cVal mag f 757 GGIO4 MX AnIn1 mag f 758 GGIO4 MX AnIn2 mag f 759 GGIO4 MX AnIn3 mag f 760 GGIO4 MX AnIn4 mag f Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 761 GGIO4 MX AnIn5 mag f 762 GGIO4 MX AnIn6 mag f 763 GGIO4 MX AnIn7 mag f 764 GGIO4 MX ...

Page 761: ...q 8 GGIO1 ST Ind4 stVal 9 GGIO1 ST Ind5 q 10 GGIO1 ST Ind5 stVal 11 GGIO1 ST Ind6 q 12 GGIO1 ST Ind6 stVal Enumeration IEC 61850 report dataset items 13 GGIO1 ST Ind7 q 14 GGIO1 ST Ind7 stVal 15 GGIO1 ST Ind8 q 16 GGIO1 ST Ind8 stVal 17 GGIO1 ST Ind9 q 18 GGIO1 ST Ind9 stVal 19 GGIO1 ST Ind10 q 20 GGIO1 ST Ind10 stVal 21 GGIO1 ST Ind11 q 22 GGIO1 ST Ind11 stVal 23 GGIO1 ST Ind12 q 24 GGIO1 ST Ind1...

Page 762: ...stVal 115 GGIO1 ST Ind58 q 116 GGIO1 ST Ind58 stVal 117 GGIO1 ST Ind59 q 118 GGIO1 ST Ind59 stVal Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 119 GGIO1 ST Ind60 q 120 GGIO1 ST Ind60 stVal 121 GGIO1 ST Ind61 q 122 GGIO1 ST Ind61 stVal 123 GGIO1 ST Ind62 q 124 GGIO1 ST Ind62 stVal 125 GGIO1 ST Ind63 q 126 GGIO1 ST Ind63 stVal 127 GGIO1 ST Ind64 q 128 GGIO1 ST Ind64 stVal 129 GGIO1 ST Ind65 q 130 GGIO1 ST Ind65 ...

Page 763: ...q 224 GGIO1 ST Ind112 stVal Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 225 GGIO1 ST Ind113 q 226 GGIO1 ST Ind113 stVal 227 GGIO1 ST Ind114 q 228 GGIO1 ST Ind114 stVal 229 GGIO1 ST Ind115 q 230 GGIO1 ST Ind115 stVal 231 GGIO1 ST Ind116 q 232 GGIO1 ST Ind116 stVal 233 GGIO1 ST Ind117 q 234 GGIO1 ST Ind117 stVal 235 GGIO1 ST Ind118 q 236 GGIO1 ST Ind118 stVal 237 GGIO1 ST Ind119 q 238 GGIO1 ST Ind119 stVal 239 ...

Page 764: ...U2 MX VA phsC cVal mag f 328 MMXU2 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 329 MMXU2 MX PF phsB cVal mag f 330 MMXU2 MX PF phsC cVal mag f Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 331 MMXU3 MX TotW mag f 332 MMXU3 MX TotVAr mag f 333 MMXU3 MX TotVA mag f 334 MMXU3 MX TotPF mag f 335 MMXU3 MX Hz mag f 336 MMXU3 MX PPV phsAB cVal mag f 337 MMXU3 MX PPV phsAB cVal ang f 338 MMXU3 MX PPV phsBC cVal mag f 339 MMXU3 MX PPV phsBC ...

Page 765: ...phsC cVal mag f 433 MMXU5 MX VAr phsA cVal mag f 434 MMXU5 MX VAr phsB cVal mag f 435 MMXU5 MX VAr phsC cVal mag f 436 MMXU5 MX VA phsA cVal mag f Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 437 MMXU5 MX VA phsB cVal mag f 438 MMXU5 MX VA phsC cVal mag f 439 MMXU5 MX PF phsA cVal mag f 440 MMXU5 MX PF phsB cVal mag f 441 MMXU5 MX PF phsC cVal mag f 442 MMXU6 MX TotW mag f 443 MMXU6 MX TotVAr mag f 444 MMXU6 M...

Page 766: ...In14 q 538 GGIO5 ST UIntIn14 stVal 539 GGIO5 ST UIntIn15 q 540 GGIO5 ST UIntIn15 stVal 541 GGIO5 ST UIntIn16 q 542 GGIO5 ST UIntIn16 stVal Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 543 PDIF1 ST Str general 544 PDIF1 ST Op general 545 PDIF2 ST Str general 546 PDIF2 ST Op general 547 PDIF3 ST Str general 548 PDIF3 ST Op general 549 PDIF4 ST Str general 550 PDIF4 ST Op general 551 PDIS1 ST Str general 552 PDIS...

Page 767: ...p general 645 PIOC38 ST Str general 646 PIOC38 ST Op general 647 PIOC39 ST Str general 648 PIOC39 ST Op general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 649 PIOC40 ST Str general 650 PIOC40 ST Op general 651 PIOC41 ST Str general 652 PIOC41 ST Op general 653 PIOC42 ST Str general 654 PIOC42 ST Op general 655 PIOC43 ST Str general 656 PIOC43 ST Op general 657 PIOC44 ST Str general 658 PIOC44 ST Op general 6...

Page 768: ... 750 PTOC18 ST Op general 751 PTOC19 ST Str general 752 PTOC19 ST Op general 753 PTOC20 ST Str general 754 PTOC20 ST Op general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 755 PTOC21 ST Str general 756 PTOC21 ST Op general 757 PTOC22 ST Str general 758 PTOC22 ST Op general 759 PTOC23 ST Str general 760 PTOC23 ST Op general 761 PTOC24 ST Str general 762 PTOC24 ST Op general 763 PTOV1 ST Str general 764 PTOV1 S...

Page 769: ...eneral 856 RBRF18 ST OpIn general 857 RBRF19 ST OpEx general 858 RBRF19 ST OpIn general 859 RBRF20 ST OpEx general 860 RBRF20 ST OpIn general Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 861 RBRF21 ST OpEx general 862 RBRF21 ST OpIn general 863 RBRF22 ST OpEx general 864 RBRF22 ST OpIn general 865 RBRF23 ST OpEx general 866 RBRF23 ST OpIn general 867 RBRF24 ST OpEx general 868 RBRF24 ST OpIn general 869 RFLO1 ...

Page 770: ...l 958 XSWI5 ST Pos stVal 959 XSWI6 ST Loc stVal 960 XSWI6 ST Pos stVal 961 XSWI7 ST Loc stVal 962 XSWI7 ST Pos stVal 963 XSWI8 ST Loc stVal 964 XSWI8 ST Pos stVal 965 XSWI9 ST Loc stVal 966 XSWI9 ST Pos stVal Enumeration GOOSE dataset items 967 XSWI10 ST Loc stVal 968 XSWI10 ST Pos stVal 969 XSWI11 ST Loc stVal 970 XSWI11 ST Pos stVal 971 XSWI12 ST Loc stVal 972 XSWI12 ST Pos stVal 973 XSWI13 ST L...

Page 771: ...on Role 0 None 1 Administrator 2 Supervisor 3 Engineer 4 Operator Enumeration Role 0 None 1 Administrator 2 Supervisor 3 Engineer 4 Operator 5 Observer 6 Factory Service Enumeration Mode 0 Mode 1 1 and 3 Pole 1 Mode 2 1 Pole 2 Mode 3 3 Pole A 3 Mode 4 3 Pole B Enumeration Item 0 None 1 PP IRIG B PTP SNTP 2 IRIG B PP PTP SNTP 3 PP PTP IRIG B SNTP Enumeration Item 0 None 1 Port 1 PTP Clock 2 Port 2 ...

Page 772: ...B 120 L90 Line Current Differential System GE Multilin B 4 MEMORY MAPPING APPENDIX B B ...

Page 773: ...ded that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set C 1 2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS at the upper application layer for transfer of real time data This protocol has been in existence for several of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN e...

Page 774: ...be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the chances of missing data state changes Unbuffered reporting should generally be used for local status display C 2 3 GGIO2 DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES The GGIO2 logical node is available to provide access to the L90 virtual inputs Virtual inputs are single point control binary values that can be written by clients They are generally used as ...

Page 775: ...ctor MMXU1 MX Hz frequency MMXU1 MX PPV phsAB phase AB voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PPV phsBC phase BC voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PPV phsCA Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsA phase AG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsB phase BG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX PhV phsC phase CG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1 MX A phsA phase A current magnitud...

Page 776: ...lt locator function The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control feature XCBR1 ST Loc This is the state of the XCBR1 local remote switch A setting is provided to assign a FlexLogic operand to determine the state When local mode is true IEC 61850 client commands will be rejected XCBR1 ST Opcnt This is an operation counter as defined in IEC 61850 Command settings are provide...

Page 777: ...time of the last change of either the value or quality flags of the data item To accomplish this functionality all IEC 61850 data items must be regularly scanned for data changes and the timestamp updated when a change is detected regardless of the connection status of any IEC 61850 cli ents For applications where there is no IEC 61850 client in use the IEC 61850 SERVER SCANNING setting can be pro...

Page 778: ...nnection for greater than two minutes the connection will be aborted by the L90 This frees up the con nection to be used by other clients Therefore when using IEC 61850 reporting clients should configure report control block items such that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes 120000 ms This ensures that the L90 will not abort the connection If other MMS data is being polled...

Page 779: ... in two pre defined data structures named DNA and UserSt Each DNA and UserSt item is referred to as a bit pair GSSE messages are transmit ted in response to state changes in any of the data points contained in the message GSSE messages always contain the same number of DNA and UserSt bit pairs Depending the on the configuration only some of these bit pairs may have val ues that are of interest to ...

Page 780: ...mmended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR series IEDs and devices from other manufacturers Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR series IEDs IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters all of which must be correct to achieve the successful transfer of data It is critical that the configured data...

Page 781: ...MUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE GOOSE CONFIGURATION RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu Set ITEM 1 to GGIO3 ST Ind1 q to indicate quality flags for GGIO3 status indication 1 Set ITEM 2 to GGIO3 ST Ind1 stVal to indicate the status value for GGIO3 status indication 1 The reception dataset now contains a set of quality flags a single point st...

Page 782: ...s configured to use an automated multicast MAC scheme If the L90 destination MAC address setting is not a valid multicast address that is the least significant bit of the first byte is not set the address used as the destina tion MAC will be the same as the local MAC address but with the multicast bit set Thus if the local MAC address is 00 A0 F4 01 02 03 then the destination MAC address will be 0...

Page 783: ... with other ICD files for other IEDs from GE or other ven dors for system configuration 3 The result is saved to a SCD file which is then imported back to EnerVista UR Setup to create one or more settings file s The settings file s can then be used to update the relay s with the new configuration information The configuration process is illustrated below Figure 0 1 IED CONFIGURATION PROCESS The fo...

Page 784: ...file SCD to set communication configuration parame ters that is required addresses reception GOOSE datasets IDs of incoming GOOSE datasets etc for the IED The IED configurator functionality is implemented in the GE Multilin EnerVista UR Setup software C 5 2 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS Before creating an ICD file the user can customize the IEC 61850 related settings for the IED For example the I...

Page 785: ...urators we recommend configuring transmission GOOSE for GE Multilin IEDs before creating the ICD and strictly within EnerVista UR Setup software or the front panel display access through the Settings Product Setup Com munications IEC 61850 GSSE GOOSE Configuration Transmission Tx Configurable GOOSE menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup Configurable reception GOOSE which includes eight configurable datas...

Page 786: ...dress node contains the address parameters of the access point The GSE node provides the address element for stat ing the control block related address parameters where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the IED on which the control block is located and cbName is the name of the control block The IED node describes the pre configuration of an IED its access points t...

Page 787: ...st DataSet name Other DataSet elements FCDA fc doName daName IdInst prefix InClass InInst Other FCDA elements DOI name SDI name Val Text Other DOI elements GSEControl name datSet type confRev appID LN InType InClass prefix inst DataSet name FCDA IdInst prefix InClass InInst doName fc Other FCDA elements ReportControl name datSet intgPd rptID confRev buffered TrgOps dchg OptFields seqNum RptEnabled...

Page 788: ...s SDO The attribute DA has a func tional constraint and can either have a basic type be an enumeration or a structure of a DAType The DAType is built from BDA elements defining the structure elements which again can be BDA elements of have a base type such as DA Figure 0 5 ICD FILE STRUCTURE DATATYPETEMPLATES NODE 842798A1 CDR DataTypeTemplates LNodeType id InClass DO name type Other LNodeType ele...

Page 789: ...he procedure is pretty much the same First a substation project must be created either as an empty template or with some system information by importing a system specification file SSD Then IEDs are added to the substation Since each IED is represented by its associated ICD the ICD files are imported into the substation project and the system configurator validates the ICD files during the importi...

Page 790: ...CD file and its version and specifies options for the mapping of names to signals The Substation node describes the substation parameters Figure 0 7 SCD FILE STRUCTURE SUBSTATION NODE 842791A1 CDR SCL Header id version revision toolID nameStructure IED Section IED 2 Communication IED Section IED 1 Substation Other IED Sections DataTypeTemplates 842792A1 CDR Substation EquipmentContainer VoltageLev...

Page 791: ...onnectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub network The Address node contains the address parameters of the access point The GSE node provides the address element for stat ing the control block related address parameters where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the IED on which the control block is located and cbName is the name of the contr...

Page 792: ... update the L90 with the new configuration from an SCD file with the EnerVista UR Setup software 1 Right click anywhere in the files panel and select the Import Contents From SCD File item 2 Select the saved SCD file and click Open 842794A1 CDR IED Section IED 1 AccessPoint name Server Authentication none LDevice inst LN0 InType InClass inst DataSet elements DOI elements Inputs GSEControl elements...

Page 793: ...han one GE Multilin IED defined in the SCD file the software prompt the user to save a UR series set tings file for each IED 4 After the URS file is created modify any settings if required 5 To update the relay with the new settings right click on the settings file in the settings tree and select the Write Set tings File to Device item 6 The software will prompt for the target device Select the ta...

Page 794: ...23 SCSM IEC 61850 9 2 used B24 SCSM other GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL GSE B31 Publisher side O Yes B32 Subscriber side Yes TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLED VALUE MODEL SVC B41 Publisher side O B42 Subscriber side SERVICES SERVER PUBLISHER UR FAMILY IF SERVER SIDE B11 SUPPORTED M1 Logical device c2 Yes M2 Logical node c3 Yes M3 Data c4 Yes M4 Data set c5 Yes M5 Substitution O M6 Setting group control O R...

Page 795: ...a set name M8 5 data reference M8 6 BufTm M8 7 IntgPd M8 8 GI Logging O M9 Log control O M9 1 IntgPd M10 Log O M11 Control M Yes IF GSE B31 32 IS SUPPORTED GOOSE O Yes M12 1 entryID M12 2 DataReflnc M13 GSSE O Yes IF SVC B41 B42 IS SUPPORTED M14 Multicast SVC O M15 Unicast SVC O M16 Time M Yes M17 File transfer O Yes SERVICES AA TP MC SERVER PUBLISHER UR FAMILY SERVER CLAUSE 7 S1 ServerDirectory T...

Page 796: ...6 Yes S26 SetBRCBValues TP c6 Yes UNBUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK URCB S27 Report TP c6 Yes S27 1 data change dchg Yes S27 2 qchg change qchg S27 3 data update dupd S28 GetURCBValues TP c6 Yes S29 SetURCBValues TP c6 Yes LOGGING CLAUSE 17 LOG CONTROL BLOCK S30 GetLCBValues TP M S31 SetLCBValues TP M LOG S32 QueryLogByTime TP M S33 QueryLogByEntry TP M S34 GetLogStatusValues TP M GENERIC SUBSTATION...

Page 797: ...5 SendMSVMessage MC c10 S46 GetMSVCBValues TP O S47 SetMSVCBValues TP O UNICAST SVC S48 SendUSVMessage MC c10 S49 GetUSVCBValues TP O S50 SetUSVCBValues TP O CONTROL CLAUSE 20 S51 Select O Yes S52 SelectWithValue TP O S53 Cancel TP O Yes S54 Operate TP M Yes S55 Command Termination TP O S56 TimeActivated Operate TP O FILE TRANSFER CLAUSE 23 S57 GetFile TP M Yes S58 SetFile TP O S59 DeleteFile TP O...

Page 798: ...acking A LOGICAL NODES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL ANCR Neutral current regulator ARCO Reactive power control ATCC Automatic tap changer controller AVCO Voltage control C LOGICAL NODES FOR CONTROL CALH Alarm handling CCGR Cooling group control CILO Interlocking CPOW Point on wave switching CSWI Switch controller Yes CSYN Synchronizer controller F LOGICAL NODES FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS FCNT Counter FCSD Cur...

Page 799: ... Yes MSQI Sequence and imbalance Yes MSTA Metering statistics P LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION FUNCTIONS PDIF Differential Yes PDIR Direction comparison PDIS Distance Yes PDOP Directional overpower PDUP Directional underpower PFRC Rate of change of frequency PHAR Harmonic restraint PHIZ Ground detector PIOC Instantaneous overcurrent Yes PMRI Motor restart inhibition PMSS Motor starting time supervis...

Page 800: ...fferential measurements RPSB Power swing detection blocking Yes RREC Autoreclosing Yes RSYN Synchronism check or synchronizing Yes S LOGICAL NODES FOR SENSORS AND MONITORING SARC Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs SCBR Circuit breaker supervision SIMG Insulation medium supervision gas SIML Insulation medium supervision liquid SLTC Tap changer supervision SOPM Supervision of operating mechanism SP...

Page 801: ... Earth fault neutralizer Petersen coil YLTC Tap changer YPSH Power shunt YPTR Power transformer Z LOGICAL NODES FOR FURTHER POWER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT ZAXN Auxiliary network ZBAT Battery ZBSH Bushing ZCAB Power cable ZCAP Capacitor bank ZCON Converter ZGEN Generator ZGIL Gas insulated line ZLIN Power overhead line ZMOT Motor ZREA Reactor ZRES Resistor ZRRC Rotating reactive component ZSAR Surge arrest...

Page 802: ...C 30 L90 Line Current Differential System GE Multilin C 7 LOGICAL NODES APPENDIX C C ...

Page 803: ...nge Circuit V 24 V 28 Recommended if 1200 bits s Balanced Interchange Circuit X 24 X 27 100 bits sec 200 bits sec 300 bits sec 600 bits sec 1200 bits sec 2400 bits sec 4800 bits sec 9600 bits sec 2400 bits sec 4800 bits sec 9600 bits sec 19200 bits sec 38400 bits sec 56000 bits sec 64000 bits sec Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V 24 V 28 Standard Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V 24 V 28 Recommended...

Page 804: ...owing used in standard direction not used cannot be selected in IEC 60870 5 104 standard Process information in monitor direction 1 Single point information M_SP_NA_1 2 Single point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1 3 Double point information M_DP_NA_1 4 Double point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1 5 Step position information M_ST_NA_1 6 Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1 7 Bi...

Page 805: ...s of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1 40 Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TF_1 45 Single command C_SC_NA_1 46 Double command C_DC_NA_1 47 Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1 48 Set point command normalized value C_SE_NA_1 49 Set point command scaled value C_SE_NB_1 50 Set point command short floating point value C_SE_NC_1 ...

Page 806: ... directory select file call file call section F_SC_NA_1 123 Last section last segment F_LS_NA_1 124 Ack file ack section F_AF_NA_1 125 Segment F_SG_NA_1 126 Directory blank or X available only in monitor standard direction C_CD_NA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 1 M_SP_NA_1 X X X X X 2 M_SP_TA_1 3 M_DP_NA_1 4 M_DP_...

Page 807: ...NA_1 48 C_SE_NA_1 49 C_SE_NB_1 50 C_SE_NC_1 51 C_BO_NA_1 58 C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X 59 C_DC_TA_1 60 C_RC_TA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 PERIODIC CYCLIC BACKGROUND SCAN SPONTANEOUS INITIALIZED REQUEST OR REQUESTED ACTIVATION ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION DEACTIVATION DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ACTIVATION TERMINATION RETURN...

Page 808: ...112 P_ME_NC_1 X X X 113 P_AC_NA_1 120 F_FR_NA_1 121 F_SR_NA_1 122 F_SC_NA_1 123 F_LS_NA_1 124 F_AF_NA_1 125 F_SG_NA_1 126 F_DR_TA_1 TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION NO MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 to 36 37 to 41 44 45 46 47 PERIODIC CYCLIC BACKGROUND SCAN SPONTANEOUS INITIALIZED REQUEST OR REQUESTED ACTIVATION ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION DEACTIVATION DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION ACT...

Page 809: ...point number M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_TC_1 and M_ME_TF_1 Station interrogation Clock synchronization Clock synchronization optional see Clause 7 6 Command transmission Direct command transmission Direct setpoint command transmission Select and execute command Select and execute setpoint command C_SE ACTTERM used No additional definition Short pulse duration duration determined by a system parameter in the o...

Page 810: ...ences of events Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values File transfer in control direction Transparent file Background scan Background scan Acquisition of transmission delay Acquisition of transmission delay Definition of time outs Maximum range of values for all time outs 1 to 255 s accuracy 1 s Maximum number of outstanding I format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs w PARAMETER DE...

Page 811: ...termined by the Internet Architecture Board IAB It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Inter net The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen by the user of this standard Ethernet 802 3 Serial X 21 interface Other selection s from RFC 2200 list below if selected D 1 2 POINT LIST The IEC 60870 5 104 data points ar...

Page 812: ...D 10 L90 Line Current Differential System GE Multilin D 1 IEC 60870 5 104 APPENDIX D D ...

Page 813: ...rted in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported the complete list is described in the attached table Binary Inputs Object 1 Binary Input Changes Object 2 Binary Outputs Object 10 Control Relay Output Block Object 12 Binary Counters Object 20 Frozen Counters Object 21 Counter Change Event Object 22 Frozen Counter Event Object 23 Analog Inputs Object 30 Analog Input Changes Object 32 Analog Dea...

Page 814: ... Binary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable SELECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable Count 1 Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse On Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch On Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch Of...

Page 815: ...r Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes attach explanation ENABLE DISABLE unsolicited Function codes supported Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change No other options are permitted Default Counter Object Variation No Counters Reported Configurable attach explanation Default Object 20 Default Variation 1 Point by point list attached Coun...

Page 816: ...esp 17 28 index 3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 10 0 Binary Output Status Variation 0 is used to request default variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 17 28 index 2 Binary Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 17 28 index 129 response 00 01 start stop 17 28 inde...

Page 817: ... Variation 0 is used to request default variation 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 1 32 Bit Counter Change Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 2 16 Bit Counter Change Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 5 32 Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or a...

Page 818: ...response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 3 32 Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 4 16 Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129 response 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 5 short floating point Analog Change Event without Time 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited quantity 129...

Page 819: ...6 close 30 abort 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 5 File transfer 1 read 2 write 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 6 File transfer status 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 7 File descriptor 28 get file info 5b free format 129 response 130 unsol resp 5b free format 80 1 Internal Indications 1 read 00 01 start stop index 7 129 response 00 01 ...

Page 820: ...on is performed on a binary counter point the frozen value is available in the corresponding frozen counter point BINARY INPUT POINTS Static Steady State Object Number 1 Change Event Object Number 2 Request Function Codes supported 1 read 22 assign class Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested 2 Binary Input with status Configurable Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 req...

Page 821: ...Virtual Input 15 15 Virtual Input 16 16 Virtual Input 17 17 Virtual Input 18 18 Virtual Input 19 19 Virtual Input 20 20 Virtual Input 21 21 Virtual Input 22 22 Virtual Input 23 23 Virtual Input 24 24 Virtual Input 25 25 Virtual Input 26 26 Virtual Input 27 27 Virtual Input 28 28 Virtual Input 29 29 Virtual Input 30 30 Virtual Input 31 31 Virtual Input 32 32 Virtual Input 33 33 Virtual Input 34 34 ...

Page 822: ...0 freeze and clear noack 22 assign class Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested 1 32 Bit Binary Counter with Flag Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested 1 32 Bit Counter Change Event without time Change Event Buffer Size 10 Default Class for all points 3 FROZEN COUNTERS Static Steady State Object Number 21 Change Event Object Number 23 Request Function Codes suppo...

Page 823: ...r all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity For example an Analog Input quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bul letin 9809 001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to data type Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points ...

Page 824: ...E 12 L90 Line Current Differential System GE Multilin E 2 DNP POINT LISTS APPENDIX E E ...

Page 825: ...81 B6 2 6x 27 February 2004 URX 120 1601 0081 C1 3 0x 02 July 2002 URL 092 1601 0081 C2 3 1x 30 August 2002 URL 098 1601 0081 C3 3 0x 18 November 2002 URL 101 1601 0081 C4 3 1x 18 November 2002 URL 102 1601 0081 C5 3 0x 11 February 2003 URL 105 1601 0081 C6 3 1x 11 February 2003 URL 106 1601 0081 D1 3 2x 11 February 2003 URL 108 1601 0081 D2 3 2x 02 June 2003 URX 084 1601 0081 E1 3 3x 01 May 2003 ...

Page 826: ...ix B Modbus table and F627 and F628 enumeration tables Add Added line differential with in zone transformer functionality content from L30 manual including product description specifications and Modbus memory map Add Added restricted ground fault content from T60 manual including section 5 6c Restricted Ground Fault on page 5 207 6 3 12 Restricted Ground Fault on page 6 24 Modbus memory map and en...

Page 827: ...lete Deleted references to COM1 RS485 port in section 5 2 4b Serial Ports 5 16 5 16 Add Added section 5 2 4c Ethernet Network Topology 5 17 5 17 Update Updated Networks section 5 2 4d to include all three Ethernet ports 5 17 5 17 Update Added 0 as valid number to section 5 2 4e Modbus Protocol section 5 38 5 Delete Deleted Local Time Offset Daylight Savings Time DST start stop for month day hour f...

Page 828: ...ges meaning the Settings Input Outputs Remote Devices settings 6 1 6 1 Update Update Actual Values main menu to include Real Time Clock Synchronization submenu 6 6 7 Add Added new section for Real Time Clock synchronizing consisting of the menu of settings and the setting descriptions 6 10 6 10 Delete Deleted section 6 2 17 Ethernet Switch 6 6 11 Add Added new section 6 2 18 Remaining Connection S...

Page 829: ...osed CMND Command CMPRSN Comparison CO Contact Output COM Communication COMM Communications COMP Compensated Comparison CONN Connection CONT Continuous Contact CO ORD Coordination CPU Central Processing Unit CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code CRT CRNT Current CSA Canadian Standards Association CT Current Transformer CVT Capacitive Voltage Transformer D A Digital to Analog DC dc Direct Current DD Disturban...

Page 830: ...f Electrical and Electronic Engineers IG Ground not residual current Igd Differential Ground current IN CT Residual Current 3Io or Input INC SEQ Incomplete Sequence INIT Initiate INST Instantaneous INV Inverse I O Input Output IOC Instantaneous Overcurrent IOV Instantaneous Overvoltage IRIG Inter Range Instrumentation Group ISO International Standards Organization IUV Instantaneous Undervoltage K0...

Page 831: ... C PFLL Phase and Frequency Lock Loop PHS Phase PICS Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PKP Pickup PLC Power Line Carrier POS Positive POTT Permissive Over reaching Transfer Trip PRESS Pressure PRI Primary PROT Protection PSEL Presentation Selector pu Per Unit PUIB Pickup Current Block PUIT Pickup Current Trip PUSHBTN Pushbutton PUTT Permissive Under reaching Transfer Trip PWM Pulse Wid...

Page 832: ...TX Tx Transmit Transmitter U Under UC Undercurrent UCA Utility Communications Architecture UDP User Datagram Protocol UL Underwriters Laboratories UNBAL Unbalance UR Universal Relay URC Universal Recloser Control URS Filename extension for settings files UV Undervoltage V Hz Volts per Hertz V_0 Zero Sequence voltage V_1 Positive Sequence voltage V_2 Negative Sequence voltage VA Phase A voltage VAB...

Page 833: ...eturned with all transportation charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory Repairs or replacement under war ranty will be made without charge Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse negligence accident incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outle...

Page 834: ...F 10 L90 Line Current Differential System GE Multilin F 3 WARRANTY APPENDIX F F ...

Page 835: ... logic 5 237 Modbus registers B 52 settings 5 236 specifications 2 23 AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands 5 130 logic 5 236 Modbus registers B 52 settings 5 235 specifications 2 23 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL 3 12 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING 6 18 B BANKS 5 7 5 79 5 80 BATTERY FAILURE 7 8 BINARY INPUT POINTS E 8 BINARY OUTPUT POINTS E 9 BLOCK DIAGRAM 1 3 2 19 BLOCK SETTING 5 5 BLOCKING SCHEME ap...

Page 836: ...2 16 RS232 3 22 RS485 3 24 5 21 settings 5 24 5 29 5 34 5 49 5 50 specifications 2 30 2 31 UCA MMS 5 342 web server 5 48 COMPATIBILITY 1 4 COMTRADE B 6 B 7 CONDUCTED RFI 2 32 CONTACT INFORMATION 1 2 CONTACT INPUTS actual values 6 4 dry connections 3 19 FlexLogic operands 5 137 Modbus registers B 11 B 20 B 65 B 67 settings 5 334 specifications 2 28 thresholds 5 334 wet connections 3 19 CONTACT OUTP...

Page 837: ...NSIONS 3 1 3 2 DIRECT DEVICES Modbus registers B 23 DIRECT INPUTS actual values 6 5 description 5 343 FlexLogic operands 5 137 logic 5 345 Modbus registers B 11 B 23 settings 5 344 DIRECT INPUTS OUTPUTS error messages 7 8 DIRECT MESSAGES 5 340 DIRECT OUTPUTS description 5 343 logic 5 345 Modbus registers B 11 settings 5 344 DIRECT TRANSFER TRIP 2 17 11 4 DIRECT UNDERREACH TRANSER TRIP see entry fo...

Page 838: ... FAULT DETECTION 9 3 FAULT LOCATOR logic 9 57 Modbus registers B 16 operation 9 55 specifications 2 26 FAULT REPORT actual values 6 25 clearing 5 19 7 2 Modbus B 7 Modbus registers B 20 B 30 settings 5 57 FAULT REPORTS Modbus registers B 55 FAULT TYPE 9 55 FAX NUMBERS 1 2 FEATURES 2 1 2 3 Fiber 3 27 FIBER LASER TRANSMITTERS 3 27 FIRMWARE REVISION 6 28 FIRMWARE UPGRADES 4 2 FLASH MESSAGES 5 18 FLEX...

Page 839: ...IVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP see entry for HYBRID POTT HYBRID POTT application of settings 10 18 logic 5 311 settings 5 308 5 310 5 311 HYRBRID POTT Modbus registers B 43 I I2T CURVES 5 193 IAC CURVES 5 192 IEC 60870 5 104 PROTOCOL interoperability document D 1 points list D 9 settings 5 49 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS settings 5 346 IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS settings 5 347 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL device ID ...

Page 840: ...1 MENU HIERARCHY 1 18 4 25 MENU NAVIGATION 1 18 4 24 4 25 METERING conventions 6 12 6 13 current 2 27 demand 2 27 description 2 18 frequency 2 27 power 2 27 voltage 2 27 METERING CONVENTIONS 6 13 MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC 5 163 9 21 MODBUS data logger B 6 B 7 event recorder B 7 exception responses B 5 execute operation B 4 fault report B 7 flex state parameters 5 75 function code 03 04h B 3 func...

Page 841: ...TIONS 9 16 OPERATING TEMPERATURE 2 31 OPERATING TIMES 2 20 ORDER CODES 2 4 2 6 2 8 2 10 6 28 7 3 ORDER CODES UPDATING 7 3 ORDERING 2 4 2 6 2 8 2 10 OSCILLATORY TRANSIENT TESTING 2 32 OSCILLOGRAPHY actual values 6 26 clearing 5 19 7 2 description 2 18 Modbus B 6 Modbus registers B 20 B 30 settings 5 58 specifications 2 26 via COMTRADE B 6 via EnerVista software 4 2 OST 2 24 5 180 OUT OF STEP TRIPPI...

Page 842: ... logic 5 233 Modbus registers B 45 settings 5 232 specifications 2 23 PHASELETS 9 1 9 2 PHASOR ESTIMATION 9 20 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT actual values 6 26 PHASORS 9 1 9 2 PILOT CHANNEL RELAYING 2 15 PILOT SCHEMES application of settings 10 17 blocking 5 312 directional comparison blocking 5 312 directional comparison unblocking 5 316 DUTT 5 297 hybrid POTT 5 308 POTT 5 302 5 306 PUTT 5 300 specific...

Page 843: ... values 6 24 FlexLogic operands 5 135 Modbus registers B 12 B 60 settings 5 212 specifications 2 21 REVISION HISTORY F 1 RF IMMUNITY 2 32 RFI CONDUCTED 2 32 RMS CURRENT 2 27 RMS VOLTAGE 2 27 ROLLING DEMAND 5 63 RS232 configuration 1 10 specifications 2 30 wiring 3 22 RS422 configuration 3 31 timing 3 32 two channel application 3 32 with fiber interface 3 33 RS485 configuration 1 8 description 3 24...

Page 844: ...104 5 109 phasor measurement unit communications 5 113 phasor measurement unit recording 5 122 test values 5 357 SYSTEM FREQUENCY 5 80 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 1 6 SYSTEM SETUP 5 79 T TARGET MESSAGES 7 6 TARGET SETTING 5 5 TARGETS MENU 7 6 TCP PORT NUMBER 5 48 TEMPERATURE MONITOR 5 138 7 10 TERMINALS 3 8 5 84 TESTING channel tests 5 357 clock synchronization 11 2 final tests 11 4 force contact inputs 5...

Page 845: ...gisters B 32 settings 5 67 USERST 1 BIT PAIR 5 343 V VAR HOURS 2 27 6 19 VIBRATION TESTING 2 32 VIRTUAL INPUTS actual values 6 4 commands 7 1 FlexLogic operands 5 137 logic 5 336 Modbus registers B 9 B 67 settings 5 336 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS actual values 6 6 FlexLogic operands 5 137 Modbus registers B 68 settings 5 339 VOLTAGE BANKS 5 80 VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS 2 32 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5 231 VOLTAGE METERING M...

Page 846: ...xii L90 Line Current Differential System GE Multilin INDEX ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for UR Series L90

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 15

Brand: frako Pages: 32

Brand: CAMDEN Pages: 26

Brand: ABB Pages: 68

2CDC 113 016 M9701

Brand: ABB Pages: 10

Brand: ABB Pages: 12

Brand: ABB Pages: 42

Brand: ABB Pages: 12

CIRCUIT SHIELD 237F Series

Brand: ABB Pages: 15

Brand: ABB Pages: 24

Brand: ABB Pages: 20

Brand: ABB Pages: 25

Brand: ABB Pages: 10

Brand: ABB Pages: 22

Brand: ABB Pages: 8

Brand: ABB Pages: 12

Brand: ABB Pages: 12

Brand: ABB Pages: 12

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands